bay protection functions reb500 version 8.3 iec …...conformity this product complies with the...
TRANSCRIPT
RELION® REB500
Bay protection functions REB500Version 8.3 IECTechnical manual
/t1ainm1:nu
Events
Measurements
Disturbance records
Settings
2013-03-3010:53:.10 j$superUser joi,jectname
a
/Mainmenu
=
I ;
D
D
i!9?
J;;:::et�,�
SettirlgS
confi�ation
rua,gr,ostics
rests
O•�
L¥19"39f�
-
I D I
; = D =
/t1ainm1:nu
Events
Measurements
Disturbance records
Settings
2013-03-3010:53:.10 j$superUser joi,jectname
a
/Mainmenu
=
I ;
D
D
i!9?
J;;:::et�,�
SettirlgS
confi�ation
rua,gr,ostics
rests
O•�
L¥19"39f�
-
I D I
; = D =
Document ID: 1MRK 505 406-UENIssued: May 2019
Revision: BProduct version: 8.3
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without writtenpermission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, norused for any unauthorized purpose.
The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and maybe used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in theOpenSSLToolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographicsoftware written/developed by: Eric Young ([email protected]) and Tim Hudson([email protected]).
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product namesmentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respectiveholders.
Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or productdescription and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All personsresponsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy themselves thateach intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any applicable safety orother operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications wherea system failure and /or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons(including but not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of theperson or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested toensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.
This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely ruledout. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the manufacturer.Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible orliable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of theequipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on theapproximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility(EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specifiedvoltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of testsconducted by ABB in accordance with the product standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 forthe EMC directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the lowvoltage directive. The product is designed in accordance with the international standards ofthe IEC 60255 series.
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction.................................................................................................... 71.1 This manual....................................................................................................................................71.2 Intended audience........................................................................................................................ 71.3 Product documentation.............................................................................................................. 71.4 Symbols and conventions........................................................................................................... 71.4.1 Symbols........................................................................................................................................ 71.4.2 Document conventions............................................................................................................. 8
Section 2 Safety information.........................................................................................9
Section 3 Signals............................................................................................................ 113.1 Signal designations.................................................................................................................... 113.1.1 Bay/Station protection — function overlapping signal....................................................113.1.1.1 Signal designations.............................................................................................................113.1.1.2 Outputs generated by BP and used as SP inputs (default signals)...........................113.1.1.3 General inputs to BP........................................................................................................... 123.1.1.4 General outputs from BP................................................................................................... 123.1.2 Bay protection — function-specific signals........................................................................ 133.1.2.1 Signal designations of binary inputs and outputs.......................................................133.1.2.2 Signal designations of BP internal signals.................................................................... 143.1.2.3 Binary input signals of BP..................................................................................................143.1.2.4 Binary output signals of BP............................................................................................... 17
Section 4 System settings............................................................................................234.1 Voltage transformers for bay protection.............................................................................. 234.2 Star point setting for bay protection..................................................................................... 234.3 Scaling factor setting for bay protection..............................................................................24
Section 5 Bay protection functions.............................................................................255.1 Distance protection 21 (DIST).................................................................................................. 255.1.1 Mode of operation................................................................................................................... 255.1.2 Features..................................................................................................................................... 255.1.3 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................. 255.1.3.1 CT/VT inputs........................................................................................................................255.1.3.2 Binary inputs........................................................................................................................265.1.3.3 Binary outputs.....................................................................................................................265.1.3.4 Measurements..................................................................................................................... 275.1.4 Function settings..................................................................................................................... 275.1.5 Parameters................................................................................................................................ 305.1.6 Configuration............................................................................................................................ 375.1.6.1 General.................................................................................................................................. 375.1.6.2 Starters................................................................................................................................. 37
Table of contents
Bay protection functions REB500 1Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.1.6.3 Measurement.......................................................................................................................415.1.6.4 Definitive zone (Def).......................................................................................................... 475.1.6.5 Backup overcurrent unit (O/C Backup Protection)..................................................... 485.1.6.6 VT supervision.....................................................................................................................485.1.6.7 Tripping logic...................................................................................................................... 495.1.6.8 Power-swing blocking....................................................................................................... 505.1.6.9 Supplementary information for binary inputs............................................................. 505.1.7 Technical description.............................................................................................................. 525.1.7.1 Starters................................................................................................................................. 525.1.7.2 Distance measurement..................................................................................................... 585.1.7.3 VT supervision.....................................................................................................................645.1.7.4 Backup overcurrent function (O/C Backup)..................................................................685.1.7.5 System logic........................................................................................................................ 685.2 Definite time over- and undercurrent protection 51 (OCDT).............................................915.2.1 Mode of operation....................................................................................................................915.2.2 Features......................................................................................................................................915.2.3 Inputs and outputs...................................................................................................................915.2.3.1 CT/VT inputs........................................................................................................................915.2.3.2 Binary inputs........................................................................................................................ 915.2.3.3 Binary outputs..................................................................................................................... 915.2.3.4 Measurements..................................................................................................................... 915.2.4 Function settings..................................................................................................................... 925.2.5 Parameters................................................................................................................................ 925.2.6 Configuration............................................................................................................................925.3 Inverse time overcurrent protection 51 (OC)........................................................................945.3.1 Mode of operation................................................................................................................... 945.3.2 Features..................................................................................................................................... 945.3.3 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................. 955.3.3.1 CT/VT inputs....................................................................................................................... 955.3.3.2 Binary inputs........................................................................................................................955.3.3.3 Binary outputs.....................................................................................................................955.3.3.4 Measurements.....................................................................................................................955.3.4 Function settings..................................................................................................................... 955.3.5 Parameters................................................................................................................................ 965.3.6 Configuration............................................................................................................................965.4 Directional overcurrent definite time protection 67 (DIROCDT)......................................995.4.1 Mode of operation................................................................................................................... 995.4.2 Features..................................................................................................................................... 995.4.3 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................. 995.4.3.1 CT/VT inputs....................................................................................................................... 995.4.3.2 Binary inputs........................................................................................................................995.4.3.3 Binary outputs.....................................................................................................................995.4.3.4 Measurements.................................................................................................................... 995.4.4 Function settings...................................................................................................................1005.4.5 Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 1005.4.6 Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 101
Table of contents
2 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.5 Directional overcurrent inverse time protection 67 (DIROCINV)....................................1045.5.1 Mode of operation................................................................................................................. 1045.5.2 Features................................................................................................................................... 1045.5.3 Inputs and outputs................................................................................................................ 1055.5.3.1 CT/VT inputs..................................................................................................................... 1055.5.3.2 Binary inputs......................................................................................................................1055.5.3.3 Binary outputs...................................................................................................................1055.5.3.4 Measurements...................................................................................................................1055.5.4 Function settings................................................................................................................... 1055.5.5 Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 1065.5.6 Configuration..........................................................................................................................1075.6 Definite time over- and undervoltage protection 59/27 (OVDT).....................................1115.6.1 Mode of operation.................................................................................................................. 1115.6.2 Features.................................................................................................................................... 1115.6.3 Inputs and outputs................................................................................................................. 1115.6.3.1 CT/VT inputs...................................................................................................................... 1115.6.3.2 Binary inputs.......................................................................................................................1115.6.3.3 Binary outputs....................................................................................................................1125.6.3.4 Measurements................................................................................................................... 1125.6.4 Function settings....................................................................................................................1125.6.5 Parameters............................................................................................................................... 1125.6.6 Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 1135.7 Synchrocheck 25 (SYNC)..........................................................................................................1145.7.1 Mode of operation..................................................................................................................1145.7.2 Features....................................................................................................................................1145.7.3 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................1155.7.3.1 CT/VT inputs...................................................................................................................... 1155.7.3.2 Binary inputs...................................................................................................................... 1155.7.3.3 Binary outputs................................................................................................................... 1155.7.3.4 Measurements................................................................................................................... 1165.7.4 Function settings....................................................................................................................1165.7.5 Parameters............................................................................................................................... 1175.7.6 Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 1215.7.6.1 General.................................................................................................................................1215.7.6.2 Parameters to be set........................................................................................................ 1225.7.6.3 Supplementary information for binary inputs............................................................ 1275.8 Autoreclosure 79 (AR).............................................................................................................. 1295.8.1 Mode of operation..................................................................................................................1295.8.2 Features....................................................................................................................................1295.8.3 Inputs and outputs................................................................................................................ 1305.8.3.1 CT/VT inputs..................................................................................................................... 1305.8.3.2 Binary inputs......................................................................................................................1305.8.3.3 Binary outputs....................................................................................................................1315.8.3.4 Measurements................................................................................................................... 1315.8.4 Function settings....................................................................................................................1315.8.5 Parameters...............................................................................................................................133
Table of contents
Bay protection functions REB500 3Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.8.6 Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 1375.8.6.1 General................................................................................................................................ 1375.8.6.2 Connections between autoreclosure and distance functions.................................1385.8.6.3 Connections between autoreclosure and overcurrent functions........................... 1395.8.6.4 Coordinating autoreclosure (AR) with first and second main protections.......... 1405.8.6.5 Timers..................................................................................................................................1415.8.6.6 Supplementary information for binary inputs............................................................1445.8.6.7 Supplementary information for binary outputs.........................................................1455.8.7 Timing diagrams.....................................................................................................................1475.8.8 Checking the dead times...................................................................................................... 1545.9 Directional sensitive EF protection for grounded system 67N (DIREFGND)................ 1575.9.1 Mode of operation..................................................................................................................1575.9.2 Features....................................................................................................................................1575.9.3 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................1575.9.3.1 CT/VT inputs......................................................................................................................1575.9.3.2 Binary inputs...................................................................................................................... 1575.9.3.3 Binary outputs................................................................................................................... 1575.9.3.4 Measurements...................................................................................................................1585.9.4 Function settings................................................................................................................... 1585.9.5 Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 1595.9.6 Configuration..........................................................................................................................1605.9.6.1 Coordination with the distance protection................................................................ 1605.9.6.2 Choice of operating mode...............................................................................................1615.9.6.3 Choice of transfer tripping scheme.............................................................................. 1615.9.6.4 Setting the enabling pick-up levels............................................................................... 1655.9.6.5 Setting the characteristic angle.................................................................................... 1665.9.6.6 Setting the basic time (tBasic).........................................................................................166
5.9.6.7 Circuit-breaker delay........................................................................................................1665.9.6.8 Comparison time.............................................................................................................. 1665.9.6.9 Setting the wait time (tWait)........................................................................................... 166
5.9.6.10 Setting the transient blocking time (t TransBlk)........................................................1675.9.6.11 CT/VT inputs of the function......................................................................................... 1675.9.6.12 Supplementary information for binary inputs............................................................ 1675.9.6.13 Supplementary information for binary outputs.........................................................1685.10 Inverse time earth fault overcurrent protection 51N (I0INV)...........................................1685.10.1 Mode of operation................................................................................................................. 1685.10.2 Features................................................................................................................................... 1685.10.3 Inputs and outputs................................................................................................................ 1695.10.3.1 CT/VT inputs..................................................................................................................... 1695.10.3.2 Binary inputs......................................................................................................................1695.10.3.3 Binary outputs...................................................................................................................1695.10.3.4 Measurements...................................................................................................................1695.10.4 Function settings................................................................................................................... 1695.10.5 Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 1705.10.6 Configuration..........................................................................................................................1705.11 Logic/Trip Logic (LOGIC)........................................................................................................ 173
Table of contents
4 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.11.1 Mode of operation..................................................................................................................1735.11.2 Features....................................................................................................................................1735.11.3 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................1735.11.3.1 CT/VT inputs......................................................................................................................1735.11.3.2 Binary inputs...................................................................................................................... 1735.11.3.3 Binary outputs................................................................................................................... 1735.11.3.4 Measurements................................................................................................................... 1735.11.4 Function settings................................................................................................................... 1745.11.5 Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 1745.12 Delay/Integrator (DELAY)....................................................................................................... 1745.12.1 Mode of operation..................................................................................................................1745.12.2 Features....................................................................................................................................1755.12.3 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................1755.12.3.1 CT/VT inputs......................................................................................................................1755.12.3.2 Binary inputs...................................................................................................................... 1755.12.3.3 Binary outputs................................................................................................................... 1755.12.3.4 Measurements................................................................................................................... 1755.12.4 Function settings................................................................................................................... 1755.12.5 Parameters...............................................................................................................................1765.12.6 Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 1775.12.6.1 Operation of the function without integration...........................................................1775.12.6.2 Operation of the function with integration.................................................................1785.13 Three-phase current plausibility 46 (I3PH)..........................................................................1785.13.1 Mode of operation..................................................................................................................1785.13.2 Features....................................................................................................................................1785.13.3 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................1795.13.3.1 CT/VT inputs......................................................................................................................1795.13.3.2 Binary inputs...................................................................................................................... 1795.13.3.3 Binary outputs................................................................................................................... 1795.13.3.4 Measurements................................................................................................................... 1795.13.4 Function settings................................................................................................................... 1795.13.5 Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 1805.14 Three-phase voltage plausibility 47 (U3PH)........................................................................1805.14.1 Mode of operation................................................................................................................. 1805.14.2 Features................................................................................................................................... 1805.14.3 Inputs and outputs.................................................................................................................1815.14.3.1 CT/VT inputs...................................................................................................................... 1815.14.3.2 Binary inputs...................................................................................................................... 1815.14.3.3 Binary outputs................................................................................................................... 1815.14.3.4 Measurements................................................................................................................... 1815.14.4 Function settings....................................................................................................................1815.14.5 Parameters...............................................................................................................................1815.15 Peak value over and undercurrent protection 50 (OCINST).............................................1825.15.1 Mode of operation..................................................................................................................1825.15.2 Features....................................................................................................................................1825.15.3 Inputs and outputs................................................................................................................ 182
Table of contents
Bay protection functions REB500 5Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.15.3.1 CT/VT inputs......................................................................................................................1825.15.3.2 Binary inputs...................................................................................................................... 1825.15.3.3 Binary outputs................................................................................................................... 1835.15.3.4 Measurements...................................................................................................................1835.15.4 Function settings................................................................................................................... 1835.15.5 Parameters.............................................................................................................................. 1835.15.6 Configuration..........................................................................................................................184
Table of contents
6 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 1 Introduction
1.1 This manualGUID-B24D1C9F-CFA9-4CC0-9261-4980D3773540 v1
The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists functionblocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sortedper function of the bay protection functions. The manual can be used as a technical referenceduring the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normalservice.
1.2 Intended audienceGUID-7DC1D391-D39C-4FA6-97B2-9DF1729A518C v1
This manual addresses system engineers and installation and commissioning personnel, whouse technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and in normal service.
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protectionequipment, protection functions and the configured functional logic in the IEDs. Theinstallation and commissioning personnel must have a basic knowledge in handling electronicequipment.
1.3 Product documentationGUID-91F0A03F-D1AF-4695-A239-1FC87E7459EE v2
REB500 manuals Document numbers
Product guide 1MRK 505 402-BEN
Application manual 1MRK 505 399-UEN
Technical manual 1MRK 505 400-UEN
Operation manual 1MRK 500 132-UEN
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 452-UEN
Commissioning manual 1MRK 505 401-UEN
Application manual for bay protection functions 1MRK 505 403-UEN
Technical manual for bay protection functions 1MRK 505 406-UEN
Cyber security deployment guideline 1MRK 511 453-UEN
Communication protocol manual IEC61850 1MRK 511 450-UEN
Communication protocol manual IEC60870-5-103 1MRK 511 451-UEN
Getting started guide 1MRK 505 404-UEN
1.4 Symbols and conventions
1.4.1 SymbolsGUID-4F7DD10A-DEE5-4297-8697-B8AAB5E3262F v2
The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which couldresult in electrical shock.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 1Introduction
Bay protection functions REB500 7Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result inpersonal injury.
The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to theconcept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard whichcould result in corruption of software or damage to equipment or property.
The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.
The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project orhow to use a certain function.
Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand thatunder certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result indegraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. Therefore, comply fullywith all warning and caution notices.
1.4.2 Document conventionsGUID-37C3ACF4-BD79-43C6-B37E-24B38EE69301 v2
A particular convention may not be used in this manual.
• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The glossaryalso contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push buttonicons.
For example, to navigate the options, use and .• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.• Signal names are presented in bold.
The signal 21120_EXT_TEST_TRIP can be set and reset via the LHMI Test Trip menu.• Parameter names and parameter values are presented in italics.
For example, the default value of the Operation setting is Not inverted.• Section references are presented with the respective section numbers.
For example, see Section 1.4.2 for more details about document conventions.
Section 1 1MRK 505 406-UEN BIntroduction
8 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 2 Safety informationGUID-7CDA9FB7-5CD6-4BD5-A1D2-AAB8E7BF87A3 v2
Dangerous voltages can occur on the connectors, even though the auxiliaryvoltage has been disconnected.
Non-observance can result in death, personal injury or substantial propertydamage.
Only a competent electrician is allowed to carry out the electrical installation.
National and local electrical safety regulations must always be followed.
The frame of the IEDs has to be carefully earthed.
Whenever changes are made in the IEDs, measures should be taken to avoidinadvertent tripping.
The IEDs contain components which are sensitive to electrostatic discharge.Unnecessary touching of electronic components must therefore be avoided.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 2Safety information
Bay protection functions REB500 9Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
10
Section 3 Signals
3.1 Signal designations
3.1.1 Bay/Station protection — function overlapping signal
3.1.1.1 Signal designationsGUID-473B447A-C76B-4A92-923D-D0987D089E87 v1
The BP/SP function overlapping (general) signals correspond to the signal numbersnomenclature of the station protection system (for details, see REB500 Technical Manual).
For example, 19205_Block BP (5 digit signal number)
3.1.1.2 Outputs generated by BP and used as SP inputs (default signals)GUID-9B46ED80-5132-49AE-BD97-776AD0CFFAB8 v1
Table 1: BU_ BP outputs to SP inputs (default signals)
Parameter Description
11120_BP External TRIP This is the tripping signal generated by bay protection of REB500. It trips faultson a line with the aid of the REB500 tripping contact. Tripping thus takesaccount of the busbar configuration at the time. The signal is activated by thebay protection directly and does not therefore appear as binary input signal.
11125_BP External TRIP BBzone
This is a tripping signal generated by the bay protection of REB500 which isused to trip the entire bus zone to which the bay is connected. The trippingcommand is applied to all the bay units of the bus zone and sections of busbarsinterconnected by an isolator (intertripping).
13210_BP Block BFP This signal is directly activated by the bay protection and doesn’t thereforeappear as a binary input signal. The operation of the breaker failure protectionof the corresponding feeder is blocked. When the blocking signal is cancelledand providing a starting signal is present and current is flowing, the timers startagain at t = 0.
13610_BP Trip transfer Reserved for the special application “trip transfer”.This signal is directly activated by the bay protection unit and does nottherefore appear as a binary input signal.
13761_BP Start BFP L1L2L3_5 This signal is functionally identical to signal 13760_Start BFP L1L2L3_5, but it isdirectly activated by the bay protection and does not therefore appear as abinary input signal.
13770..13780_BP Start BFP Lp Breaker failure protection with phase-selective starting (p = 1, 2 or 3). Thebreaker failure protection timer starts when this signal is activated by BPfunctions and the BFP measures a current in the corresponding phase. Thissignal is directly activated by the bay protection and does not therefore appearas a binary input signal.
13785_BP Start BFP L1L2L3 Breaker failure protection with three-phase starting. The breaker failureprotection timer starts when this signal is activated and the BFP measures acurrent in any phase.This signal is directly activated by the bay protection and does not thereforeappear as a binary input signal.
13790_BP External start BFP Breaker failure protection with three-phase starting. The breaker failureprotection timer starts when this signal is activated regardless of the currentmeasurement.This signal is directly activated by the bay protection and does not thereforeappear as a binary input signal.
Table continues on next page
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 3Signals
Bay protection functions REB500 11Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Parameter Description
13797_BP Start BFP L0 Breaker failure protection with L0 - starting. The breaker failure protection timerstarts when this signal is activated by BP functions and the BFP measures acurrent in the neutral system. This signal is directly activated by the bayprotection and does not therefore appear as a binary input signal.
16760_BP Global Start DR Starts those disturbance recorders in the bay units that are configured. Thesignal Central start DR in the bay units must be configured. This signal isdirectly activated by the BP unit and does not therefore appear as a binary inputsignal.
29110_BP TRIP Three phase tripping commands of the bay protection functions grouped to onethree phase tripping command.
29115_BP TRIP L1 Phase L1 tripping commands of the bay protection functions grouped to one L1tripping command.
29120_BP TRIP L2 Phase L2 tripping commands of the bay protection functions grouped to one L2tripping command.
29125_BP TRIP L3 Phase L3 tripping commands of the bay protection functions grouped to one L3tripping command.
3.1.1.3 General inputs to BPGUID-12A957D0-9790-4481-A4DD-9AEB710C7EDA v1
Table 2: BU_ Inputs to BP
Signal Description
19205_Block BP The BP output signals of the respective bay unit are blocked. (Internalprocessing of the functions continues and therefore, measurements andsignals continue to be displayed on the local HMI.)
19600_Activation BP ParSet_1 The protection functions and settings assigned to parameter set 1 areactive. They remain active after the signal has been reset.
19605_Activation BP ParSet_2 The protection functions and settings assigned to parameter set 2 areactive. They remain active after the signal has been reset.
19610_Activation BP ParSet_3 The protection functions and settings assigned to parameter set 3 areactive. They remain active after the signal has been reset.
19615_Activation BP ParSet_4 The protection functions and settings assigned to parameter set 4 areactive. They remain active after the signal has been reset.
Table 3: CU_ Inputs to BP
Signal Description
39205_Block BP The bay protection output signals are blocked throughout the system(internal processing of the functions continues and thereforemeasurements and signals continue to be displayed on the local HMI).
3.1.1.4 General outputs from BPGUID-709FCA1C-61DC-4212-B18C-A3C7E665BA81 v1
Table 4: BU_ Output signals from BP
Signal Description
29405_BP blocked Signals that the outputs of the bay protection functions are blocked (eitherthe bay concerned or throughout the system).
29410_BP partial blocked Signals certain bay protection functions are blocked (Signal must be setexplicitly in the bay protection).
29600 ParaSet_1 active Signals that parameter set 1 is active (activated via the station bus or aninput signal).
Table continues on next page
Section 3 1MRK 505 406-UEN BSignals
12 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Signal Description
29605 ParaSet_2 active Signals that parameter set 2 is active (activated via the station bus or aninput signal).
29610 ParaSet_3 active Signals that parameter set 3 is active (activated via the station bus or aninput signal).
29615 ParaSet_4 active Signals that parameter set 4 is active (activated via the station bus or aninput signal).
Table 5: CU_ Output signals from BP
Signal Description
49405_BP blocked Signals that the outputs of the bay protection functions are blocked (eitherindividual bays or throughout the system).
49410_BP partial blocked Signals that certain bay protection output signals in specific bays orthroughout the entire system are blocked (Must be configured togetherwith the corresponding BU output signal 29410_BP partial blocked).
3.1.2 Bay protection — function-specific signals
3.1.2.1 Signal designations of binary inputs and outputsGUID-FE8F3DC7-0BD5-420D-B714-A153E9909188 v1
The signal range of REB500 is expanded for the bay protection functions. The BP function-specific signal can be identified by a 6 digit signal number.
Example: Signal 211105_DIST_Trip CB L1
211105 DIST Trip CB L1
6 Digit signal number Protection function Signal designation
Table 6: 6 Digit signal numbers nomenclature
Digit 1Category
Digit 2,3Protectionfunction
Digit 4Signal function
Digit 5,6Sequence number
1 BU_in 11 DIST 1 TRIP 05
2 BU_out 12 OCDT 2 Block command 10
3 CU_in 13 OCINV 3 Tripping signal 15
4 CU_out 14 DIROCDT 4 Blocking signal 20
5 System 15 DIROCINV 5 Bus image etc.
16 OVTD 6 Control
17 SYNC 7 Start
18 AR 8 General alarm
20 DIREFGND
21 I0INV
22 LOGIC
23 DELAY
24 CHKI3PH
25 CHKU3PH
26 OCINST
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 3Signals
Bay protection functions REB500 13Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
3.1.2.2 Signal designations of BP internal signalsGUID-764F4101-DC86-4CF1-9017-FD5A8781F16F v1
Each BP function provides a set of internal input and output signals. They can be mapped tobinary inputs (optocoupler) and outputs (contacts) of the bay unit by using the correspondingbinary inputs and output signals.
Example:
BP internal Signal Designation of binary input signal
Trip CB L1 211105_DIST TRIP CB L1
3.1.2.3 Binary input signals of BPGUID-B4B529FA-3ECA-4C05-AF69-405710ED47A4 v1
Table 7: BU_ DIST input signals
BP internal signal text Designation of binary input signal Description
Ext Blk Dist 111205_DIST Ext. Block Dist. Input for disabling the distance protectionfunction.
Ext Blk PSB 111215_DIST Ext. Blk. PSB Input for blocking the power-swing function
Ext Blk O/C 111220_DIST Ext. Block O/C Input the backup overcurrent function
ExtBlkSOTF 111225_DIST Ext. Block SOTF Input for blocking the tripping condition forthe switch-onto-fault logic
ExtBlkHF 111230_DIST Ext. Block HF Input for blocking a received PLC signal(controlled, for example, by a sensitive E/Fscheme using the same PLC channel
ExtBlock Z1 111235_DIST Ext. Block Z1 Input for blocking measurement in the firstzone
Manual close 111505_DIST Manual Close Circuit breaker manual close command
Isolator Open 111510_DIST Isolator Open Isolator open signal for activating the ‘short-zone’ logic and protection (T section in 1½breaker schemes)
ChgMeasDir 111605_DIST Change Meas. Dir. Input for changing the direction ofmeasurement
DeadLine 111805_DIST Deadline Line de-energized signal (auxiliary contact onthe circuit-breaker when the VTs are on thebusbar)
ZExtension 111810_DIST Zextension External zone extension control signalZone extension
Com Rec 111815_DIST Com Rec Input for PLC signal from the remote station
Com Fail 111820_DIST Com Fail Input for PLC failure signal
1PolAR 111825_DIST 1 pol AR Single-phase auto-reclosure ready
ZExtensionAR 111830_DIST ZExtension AR Zone extension control signalby AR
Table 8: BU_ OCDT input signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description
Block 112205_OCDT Block Input for blocking OCDT
Table 9: BU_ OCINV input signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description
Block 113205_OCINV Block Input for blocking of OCINV
Section 3 1MRK 505 406-UEN BSignals
14 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Table 10: BU_ DIROCDT input signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description
Block 114205_DIROCDT Block Input for Blocking of DIROCDT
Receive 114805_DIROCDT Receive PLC receive signal
Table 11: BU_ DIROCINV input signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description
Block 115205_DIROCINV Block Input for blocking of DIROCINV
Receive 115805_DIROCINV Receive PLC receive signal
Table 12: BU_ OVDT input signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description
Block 116205_OVDT Block Input for blocking of OVTD
Table 13: BU_ SYNC input signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description
Release Input 1 117205_SYNC Release Input 1 Enabling the synchrocheck function
Release Input 2 117210_SYNC Release Input 2 Enabling the synchrocheck function
Interlock Sync bus 1 117215_SYNC Interlock Bus 1 Input for interlocking the synchrocheck O/P’s
Interlock Sync bus 2 117220_SYNC Interlock Bus 2 Input for interlocking the synchrocheck O/P’s
Interlock Sync line 117225_SYNC Interlock Line Inputs for interlocking the synchrocheck O/P’s
Bus 1 Active 117805_SYNC Bus 1 Active Input for remotely switching voltage channel(bus 1) in double busbar stations
Bus 2 Active 117810_SYNC Bus 2 Active Input for remotely switching voltage channel(bus 2) in double busbar stations
Override Sync 117815_SYNC Override Bypassing the synchrocheck function
Operation ModeInput 1
117820_SYNC Op. Mode Input 1 Inputs for remotely selecting operating mode
Operation ModeInput 2
117825_SYNC Op. Mode Input 2 Inputs for remotely selecting operating mode
Table 14: BU_ AR input signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description
Ext. block AR 118205_AR Ext.Block AR External blocking input
Cond. Block AR 118210_AR Cond.Block AR Conditional blocking input
Inhibit Close 118215_AR Inhibit Close Block reclosure by follower (red.scheme)
Mast. no Succ. 118220_AR Mast. no Succ. Block from master CB
Trip CB 3P 118305_AR Trip CB 3P Three phase trip
Trip CB 118310_AR Trip CB General trip
Trip CB2 3P *) 118315_AR Trip CB2 3P Redundant three phase trip
Trip CB2 *) 118320_AR Trip CB2 Redundant general trip
Trip CB3 3P *) 118325_AR Trip CB3 3P Redundant three phase trip
Table continues on next page
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 3Signals
Bay protection functions REB500 15Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description
Trip CB3 *) 118330_AR Trip CB3 Redundant general trip
CB Ready 118505_AR CB Ready CB ready for open/close/open cycle
CO Ready 118510_AR CO Ready CB ready for close/open cycle
CB Open 118515_AR CB Open CB Open
CB2 Ready **) 118520_AR CB2 Ready CB ready for open/close/open cycle
CO2 Ready **) 118525_AR CO Ready 2 CB ready for close/open cycle
CB2 Open **) 118530_AR CB2 Open CB2 Open
Manual Close 118535_AR Manual Close Blocking I/P excited by the manual CB closesignal.
CB2 Priority **) 118540_AR CB2 Priority CB2 preferred circuit-breaker
Start 118705_AR Start Start
Start 2 *) 118710_AR Start 2 Redundand start
Start 3 *) 118715_AR Start 3 Redundant start
Dead Line 118805_AR Dead Line Deadline
Dead Line 2 **) 118810_AR Dead Line 2 Deadline 2
Extended t1 118815_AR Extended t1 External extension of dead time
Synchro Check 118820_AR Synchro Check Synchrocheck
Synchro Check 2 **) 118825_AR Synchro Check 2 Synchrocheck 2
Ex SC ByPass 118830_AR Ext. SC ByPass External Synchrocheck bypass
MD1_EXT_1P_1P 118835_AR EXT_1P_1P External 1P-1P selector for 1st. AR
MD1_EXT_1P_3P 118840_AR EXT_1P_3P External 1P-3P selector for 1st. AR
MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P 118845_AR EXT_1P3P_3P External 1P3P-3P selector for 1st. AR
MD1_EXT_1P3P_1P3P 118850_AR EXT_1P3P_1P3P Ext. 1P3P-1P3P select. for 1st. AR
Master Delay 118855_AR Master Delay Delay from master CB
*) 2 and 3 denote the inputs of protection functions 2 and 3 or relays 2 and 3 in a redundant protection scheme.**) 2 denotes the inputs for CB2 in a duplex scheme.
Table 15: BU_ DIREFGND input signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description
Block 120205_DIREFGND Block Input for blocking of DIREFGND
CB Closed 120505_DIREFGND CB Closed CB position indicator signal
Extern Start L1 120710_DIREFGND Ext. Start L1 Input for Dist. protection phase L1 starting
Extern Start L2 120715_DIREFGND Ext. Start L2 Input for Dist. protection phase L2 starting
Extern Start L3 120720_DIREFGND Ext. Start L3 Input for Dist. protection phase L3 starting
Extern Trip 3P 120725_DIREFGND Ext. Trip 3P Input for Dist. protection Trip CB three phase
Extern Trip 120730_DIREFGND Ext. Trip Input for Dist. protection Trip CB
Receive 120805_DIREFGND Receive PLC receive signal
VT supervision 120810_DIREFGND VTSupervision
Input for VT supervision
Table 16: BU_ I0INV input signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description
Block 121205_I0INV Block Input for blocking of I0INV
Section 3 1MRK 505 406-UEN BSignals
16 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Table 17: BU_ Logic input signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description
Block 122205_LOGIC Block Input for blocking LOGIC function
Binary Input 1 122805_LOGIC Binary Input 1 Logic input 1
Binary Input 2 122810_LOGIC Binary Input 2 Logic input 2
Binary Input 3 122815_LOGIC Binary Input 3 Logic input 3
Binary Input 4 122820_LOGIC Binary Input 4 Logic input 4
Table 18: BU_ Delay input signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description
Block 123205_DELAY Block Input for blocking of DELAY function
Binary Input 123805_DELAY Binary Input Input to be delayed
Table 19: BU_CHKI3PH input signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description
Block 124205_CHKI3PH Block Input for blocking of CHKI3PH
Table 20: BU_ CHKU3PH input signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description
Block 125205_CHKU3PH Block Input for blocking of CHKU3PH
Table 21: BU_ OCINST input signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary input signal Description
Block 126205_OCINST Block Input for blocking of OCINST
3.1.2.4 Binary output signals of BPGUID-F1D864A5-98AE-4329-8CF0-DEA1F988A246 v1
Table 22: BU_ DIST output signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal
Description
Trip CB L1 211105_DIST TRIP CB L1 Circuit-breaker L1 phase tripThis signal is disabled while a blockingsignal is being applied with the exception ofa trip by the backup over-current protection.
Trip CB L2 211110_DIST TRIP CB L2 Circuit-breaker L2 phase tripThis signal is disabled while a blockingsignal is being applied with the exception ofa trip by the backup over-current protection
Trip CB L3 211115_DIST TRIP CB L3 Circuit-breaker L3 phase tripThis signal is disabled while a blockingsignal is being applied with the exception ofa trip by the backup over-current protection.
Trip CB 211305_DIST TRIP CB General circuit-breaker tripping signal. Thissignal is disabled while a blocking signal isbeing applied with the exception of a trip bythe backup overcurrent protection.
Table continues on next page
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 3Signals
Bay protection functions REB500 17Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal
Description
Trip L1L2L3Trip L1L2L3 Aux
211310_DIST Trip L1L2L3211315_DIST Trip L1L2L3 Aux
General tripping signal. This signal is notdisabled while a blocking signal is beingapplied.
Trip CB 3P 211320_DIST Trip CB 3ph Three-phase trip signal. This signal isdisabled while a blocking signal is beingapplied with the exception of a trip by thebackup overcurrent protection.
Trip CB 1P 211325_DIST Trip CB 1ph Single-phase trip signal. This signal isdisabled while a blocking signal is beingapplied with the exception of a trip by thebackup overcurrent protection.
Trip O/C 211330_DIST Trip O/C Backup overcurrent trip signal.
Trip SOTF 211335_DIST Trip SOTF Switch-onto-fault trip signal.
Trip Com 211340_DIST Trip Com Signal for tripping either enabled by thereceipt of a permissive signal or the non-receipt of a blocking signal. (This signal isdisabled while a blocking signal is beingapplied.)
Trip Stub 211345_DIST Trip Stub Short-zone protection trip signal.
Dist Blocked 211405_DIST Blocked Signal indicating that the distanceprotection is blocked.
DelDistBlk 211410_DIST Del Blocked Signal delayed by 12 s indicating that thedistance protection is blocked.
Start L1+L2+L3 211705_DIST Start L1+L2+L3 General distance protection starting signal(OR logic for all starting signals excepting‘weak infeed').
Start L1L2L3Start L1L2L3 Aux
211710_DIST StartL1L2L3211715_DIST Start L1L2L3Aux
General distance protection starting signal(OR logic for all starting signals includingweak infeed').
Start L1Start L1 Aux
211720_DIST Start L1211725_DIST Start L1 Aux
Distance protection L1 phase starting signal(including ‘weak infeed').
Start L2Start L2 Aux
211730_DIST Start L2211735_DIST Start L2 Aux
Distance protection L2 phase starting signal(including ‘weak infeed').
Start L3Start L3 Aux
211740_DIST Start L3211745_DIST Start L3 Aux
Distance protection L3 phase starting signal(including weak infeed).
Start L0Start L0 Aux
211750_DIST Start E211755_DIST Start E Aux
Distance protection E/F starting signal (U0or I0). Only generated together with a phasestarter.
Start I0 211760_DIST Start I0 Neutral current starting signal (I0).
Start U0 211765_DIST Start U0 Neutral voltage starting signal (U0).
Start OC 211770_DIST Start O/C Overcurrent starting signal.
Start SOFT 211780_DIST Start SOTF Enabling signal for the switch-onto-faultprot.
Start O/C 211785_DIST Start OC Backup overcurrent start signal.
Start UZ 211790_DIST Start UZ Underimpedance starting signal.
Start 1ph 211805_DIST Start 1ph Indicates that the distance protection wasstarted by a single phase.
Delay >= 2 211810_DIST Delay >= 2 Signal for starting in Zone 2 or higher.
Delay 1 211815_DIST Delay 1 Signal for starting in Zone 1.
Delay 2 211820_DIST Delay 2 Signal for starting in Zone 2.
Delay 3 211825_DIST Delay 3 Signal for starting in Zone 3.
Table continues on next page
Section 3 1MRK 505 406-UEN BSignals
18 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal
Description
Delay 4 211830_DIST Delay 4 Signal for starting in Zone 4 (exceptingwhen Zone 4 is being used as anoverreaching zone).
Delay Def 211835_DIST Delay Def Signal for starting in the final zone.
Meas Main 211840_DIST Meas Main Measurement by the distance function(Zones 1, 2, 3, 4 or the final zone).
Meas Oreach 211845_DIST Meas Oreach Measurement in the distance protectionoverreach zone.
Meas Fward 211850_DIST Meas Fward Measurement by the distance protection inthe forwards direction.
Meas Bward 211855_DIST Meas Bward Measurement by the distance protection inthe reverse direction (reverse zone).
Weak Infeed 211860_DIST Weak Infeed Tripping by the ‘weak infeed’ function.
Power Swing 211865_DIST Power Swing Power-swing blocking function picked up.
VTSup 211870_DIST VT Sup VT supervision picked up.
VTSup Delay 211875_DIST VT Sup Delay Delayed operation of the VT supervisionafter 12 s.
Com Send 211880_DIST Com Send Signal generated when a transfer trip signalis transmitted.
Com Boost 211885_DIST Com Boost Signal for boosting PLC transmitting power.
Freq dev 211890_DIST Freq Dev Signal indicating a deviation of the memoryvoltage frequency.
Table 23: BU_OCDT output signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal
Description
Trip 212105_OCDT TRIP Trip signal
Start 212705_OCDT Start Start signal
Table 24: BU_OCINV output signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal
Description
Trip 213105_OCINV TRIP Trip signal
Start 213705_OCINV Start Start signal
Table 25: BU_DIROCDT output signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal
Description
Trip 214105_DIROCDT TRIP Trip signal
Start 214705_DIROCDT Start Start signal
Start L1 214710_DIROCDT Start L1 L1 phase start signal
Start L2 214715_DIROCDT Start L2 L2 phase start signal
Table continues on next page
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 3Signals
Bay protection functions REB500 19Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal
Description
Start L3 214720_DIROCDT Start L3 L3 phase start signal
MeasFwd 214805_DIROCDT MeasFwd Signals measurement in the forwardsdirection.
MeasBwd 214810_DIROCDT MeasBwd Signals measurement in thebackwards direction.
Table 26: BU_DIROCINV output signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal
Description
Trip 215305_DIROCINV TRIP Trip signal
Start 215705_DIROCINV Start Start signal
Start L1 215710_DIROCINV Start L1 L1 phase start signal
Start L2 215715_DIROCINV Start L2 L2 phase start signal
Start L3 215720_DIROCINV Start L3 L3 phase start signal
MeasFwd 215805_DIROCINV MeasFwd Signals measurement in the forwardsdirection.
MeasBwd 215810_DIROCINV MeasBwd Signals measurement in thebackwards direction.
Table 27: BU_OVDT output signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal
Description
Trip 216105_OVDT TRIP Trip signal
Start 216705_OVDT Start Start signal
Table 28: BU_SYNC output signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal
Description
Permit To Close 217105_SYNC Permit to Close Circuit-breaker closing enable signal
Sync Blocked 217405_SYNC Blocked Function disabled signal
Trig Blocked 217410_SYNC Trig.Blocked Enable output blocked signal
Start 217705_SYNC Start Function pick-up
Sync Override 217805_SYNC Override Synchrocheck bypassed signal
Ampl Diff OK 217810_SYNC Ampl. Diff. OK Amplitude difference in permissiblerange
Phase Diff OK 217815_SYNC Phase Diff. OK Phase-shift in permissible range
Freq Diff OK 217820_SYNC Freq. Diff. OK Frequency difference in permissiblerange
Live Bus OK 217825_SYNC Live Bus OK Busbars energized
Dead Bus OK 217830_SYNC Dead Bus OK Busbars de-energized
Live Line OK 217835_SYNC Live Line OK Line energized
Dead Line OK 217840_SYNC Dead Line OK Line de-energized
Section 3 1MRK 505 406-UEN BSignals
20 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Table 29: BU_AR output signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal
Description
Trip 3-Pol 218310_AR Trip 3-Pol Prepare trip of all three phases
Def. Trip 218315_AR Def. Trip Definitive trip
Inhibit Outp 218405_AR Inhibit Output Block for Follower recloser
AR Blocked 218410_AR Blocked Reclosure function blocked
Block to Flwr 218415_AR Block to Flwr. Block Follower CB
Close CB 218605_AR Close CB CB close signal
Close CB2 **) 218610_AR Close CB2 CB2 close signal
AR Ready 218805_AR Ready Reclosure function ready
In Progress 218810_AR In Progress Reclosure cycle running
First AR 1P 218815_AR First AR 1P 1st single-phase reclosure in progress
First AR 3P 218820_AR First AR 3P 1st three-phase reclosure in progress
Second AR 218825_AR Second AR 2nd Reclosure in progress
Third AR 218830_AR Third AR 3rd reclosure in progress
Fourth AR 218835_AR Fourth AR 4th reclosure in progress
Delay Flwr 218840_AR Delay Flwr. Delay Follower CB
ZExtension 218845_AR Z Extension Overreach switching signal
**) 2 denotes the inputs for CB2 in a duplex scheme.
Table 30: BU_DIREFGND output signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal
Description
Trip 220105_DIREFGND TRIP Trip signal
Receive Inh 220405_DIREFGND ReceiveInh.
Input for Distance function to preventreceiving a PLC signal. To beconnected to input ‘ExtBlkHF’
Start 220705_DIREFGND Start Start signal
MeasFwd 220805_DIREFGND Meas.Forward
Signals measurement in the forwardsdirection.
MeasBwd 220810_DIREFGND Meas.Backward
Signals measurement in thebackwards direction.
Send 220815_DIREFGND Send Signal to be sent to remote end of line
Table 31: BU_I0INV output signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal
Description
Trip 221105_I0INV TRIP Trip signal
Start 221705_I0INV Start Start signal
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 3Signals
Bay protection functions REB500 21Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Table 32: BU_LOGIC output signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal
Description
Binary output 222805_LOGIC Binary Output Logic signal (output from logic)
Binary output 222810_LOGIC BINARYOUTPUT
Trip signal (output from trip logic)
Table 33: BU_DELAY output signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal
Description
Trip 223105_DELAY TRIP Trip signal
Start 223705_DELAY Start Start signal
Table 34: BU_CHKI3PH output signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal
Description
Trip 224605_CHKI3PH Picked Up Trip signal
Table 35: BU_CHKU3PH output signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal
Description
Trip 225605_CHKU3PH Picked Up Trip signal
Table 36: BU_OCINST output signals
BP internal signal Designation of binary outputsignal
Description
Trip 226105_OCINST TRIP Trip signal
Start 226705_OCINST Start Start signal
Section 3 1MRK 505 406-UEN BSignals
22 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 4 System settings
4.1 Voltage transformers for bay protectionGUID-C56299BD-E6CE-4FD3-A0C4-6040FFEAF8D0 v1
The HMI500 Settings/Voltage transformers/Overview tab opens a dialog with the list of allvoltage transformers in the single-line diagram with their labels, bay labels primary andsecondary rated voltages.
In the Details view, the description can be edited in the input field Markings. The ratio isdetermined by the primary and secondary ratings entered in the Transformer ratio input field.The VT input is a single winding, which is suitable for all the main VT secondary ratings, theeffective voltage being set via HMI500 to either 100 V or 200 V. Other voltages areaccommodated by appropriately setting the scaling factor.
This menu item appears only if voltage transformers have been fitted.
17000039-IEC19000402-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000402 V1 EN-US
Figure 1: Settings/Voltage transformers
4.2 Star point setting for bay protectionGUID-E46BBD87-3168-4615-9034-73AC7E11B8E4 v1
If a REB500 bay unit includes bay protection functionality with 3-phase voltagemeasurement, the mode of VT connection 3Phase_Star is mandatory.
Setting example for BP applications:VT data:
UN primary = 220 kV / √3
UN secondary = 110 V / √3
Connection to REB500: 3 phases_star (mandatory connection)
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 4System settings
Bay protection functions REB500 23Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Settings made in HMI500
VT connection: 3 phases_star (mandatory setting)
Primary voltage: 220,000 V
Secondary voltage: 100 V
Scaling factor: 1.1
4.3 Scaling factor setting for bay protectionGUID-A75CBB73-281A-482A-B09A-C94D9D528700 v1
The scaling factor only applies to the voltage functions and not to distanceprotection.
Section 4 1MRK 505 406-UEN BSystem settings
24 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Section 5 Bay protection functions
5.1 Distance protection 21 (DIST)
5.1.1 Mode of operationGUID-3308DD58-A1A9-4B83-8EAA-20A7460EF61B v1
Distance protection for the high-speed discriminative protection of long or short overheadlines or cables, double-circuit lines, heavily loaded lines, lines with weak infeeds and what arereferred to as short-zone lines.
The protection is applicable to solidly or low-resistance grounded systems, systems withPetersen coils or to ungrounded systems.
All kinds of faults are detected including close-in three-phase faults, cross-country faults,evolving faults and high-resistance ground faults. The protection remains stable in thepresence of power swings and reversal of energy direction. Switching onto an existing faultresults in instantaneous tripping of the circuit-breaker.
The distance function can also act as backup protection for the power transformer andneighboring lines. Most of the logic described in this section (for example, the transmission ofsignals) is not used for these applications.
5.1.2 FeaturesGUID-C6B602BB-E3EC-46F4-9602-3BF51C578BEE v1
• Overcurrent or underimpedance starters (polygon characteristic)• Directional or non-directional (configurable) underimpedance starters• 5 distance stages (independently set polygon characteristics)• Polygon characteristic with adjustable load discrimination• 6 concurrently computed measuring loops (L1E, L2E, L3E, L1L2, L2L3, L3L1)• Definite time overcurrent backup protection also applicable for protecting short zones (T
zone in 1½ breaker schemes)• VT supervision• Power-swing blocking• Tripping logics for:
• Switch-onto-fault protection• Overreaching zone• Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (also for weak infeed and
communications channel failure)• Permissive overreaching transfer tripping (also for weak infeed, communications
channel failure and reversal of energy direction)• Blocking scheme (also for reversal of energy direction)
5.1.3 Inputs and outputs
5.1.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-27BEC646-2633-467C-8159-5E680C7F3C12 v1
• Three-phase currents• Three-phase voltages• Neutral current
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 25Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.1.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-D9BCB87F-F715-4676-B9D1-1FC611FFE802 v1
• Reversal of measuring direction• Distance function blocking• Underimpedance starter blocking• Power-swing blocking• Overcurrent backup blocking (O/C backup)• Dead line• Manual CB close• Zone extension• Isolator open• Communication receive• Communication channel failure• Single-phase autoreclosure ready• Tripping condition blocking for the switch-onto-fault protection• Incoming PLC blocking signal• First zone blocking
5.1.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-AB66B1B6-34A5-4616-9197-564DB60CD23A v1
• L1+L2+L3 starters• L1L2L3 starter• L1 starter• L2 starter• L3 starter• E starter• I0 starter• U0 starter• I> starter• Z< starter• Overcurrent backup starter (O/C backup)• Switch-onto-fault starter• Single-phase starter• CB trip• L1L2L3 trip• L1 trip• L2 trip• L3 trip• Three-phase trip• Single-phase trip• Overcurrent backup trip (O/C backup)• Switch-onto-fault trip• Trip with transfer trip signal• Short-zone protection trip• Time ≥ 2nd step• Timer• Zone 2 time• Zone 3 time• Zone 4 time• Final zone time• Measurement• Overreaching measurement• Forwards measurement• Reverse measurement• Weak infeed trip• Distance protection blocked• Power-swing blocking• VT supervision• Delayed VT supervision
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
26 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
• Communication send• PLC boost• Memory frequency deviation
5.1.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-33AEC56A-BB6F-4D45-99D1-FCD9E3DABA7C v1
• Impedance loop L1E• Impedance loop L2E• Impedance loop L3E• Impedance loop L1L2• Impedance loop L2L3• Impedance loop L3L1
5.1.4 Function settingsGUID-D903B0FE-A515-489B-8473-58E5BD3657D4 v1
Table 37: General
Text Unit Default Min Max Step Setting
ParSet 1..4 P1 (Select) X
CT Neutral Bus side (Select) X
Ref. Length ohm/phase 01.000 0.01 30.000 0.001 X
U input CT/VT-Addr. 5 5 5 0
I input CT/VT-Addr. 1 1 1 0
I0 input CT/VT-Addr. 0 0 4 4 X 1)
I0P input CT/VT-Addr. 0 0 4 4 X 1)
I O/C backup IN 000.00 0 10 0.01 X
Delay O/C backup s 005.00 0 10 0.01 X
Time PS block s 000.00 0 10 0.01 X
1) Either one or other of these two inputs (I0, I0P) can be used but not both.
Table 38: Starting
Text Unit Default Min Max Step Setting
StartMode UZ (Select) X
PhaseSelMode solid ground (Select) X
GndFaultMode I0 (Select) X
IStart IN 001.00 0.5 10 0.01 X 1)
Imin IN 000.20 0.1 2 0.01 X
3I0min IN 000.20 0.1 2 0.01 X
3U0min UN 000.00 0 2 0.01 X
XA ohm/phase 020.0 0 999 0.1 X
XB ohm/phase -010.0 -999 0 0.1 X
RA ohm/phase 015.0 0 999 0.1 X
RB ohm/phase -010.0 -999 0 0.1 X
RLoad ohm/phase 008.0 0 999 0.1 X
Table continues on next page
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 27Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Text Unit Default Min Max Step Setting
AngleLoad deg 40 15 65 1 X
Uweak UN 000.00 0 2 0.01 X
1) IStart is only effective for StartMode = I>.
Table 39: Measurement
Text Unit Default Min Max Step Setting
Del (Def) s 002.00 0 10 0.01 X
K0m 1 000.00 0 8 0.01 X
K0m Angle deg 000.00 -90 90 0.01 X
ILoad IN 00.50 0 2 0.10 X
Umin Fault UN 000.05 0.01 2 0.01 X
MemDirMode Trip (Select) X
DefDirMode non-dir (Select) X
BlockZ1 off (Select) X
X(1) ohm/phase 003.00 -300 300 0.01 X
R(1) ohm/phase 001.00 -300 300 0.01 X
RR(1) ohm/phase 003.00 -300 300 0.01 X
RRE(1) ohm/phase 004.00 -300 300 0.01 X
k0(1) 1 000.00 0 8 0.01 X
k0 Angle(1) deg 000.00 -90 90 0.01 X
Delay(1) s 002.00 0 10 0.01 X
X(2) ohm/phase 006.00 -300 300 0.01 X
R(2) ohm/phase 002.00 -300 300 0.01 X
RR(2) ohm/phase 006.00 -300 300 0.01 X
RRE(2) ohm/phase 008.00 -300 300 0.01 X
K0(2) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01 X
K0 Angle(2) deg 000.00 -180 180 0.01 X
Delay(2) s 000.50 0 10 0.01 X
X(3) ohm/phase 010.00 -300 300 0.01 X
R(3) ohm/phase 003.00 -300 300 0.01 X
RR(3) ohm/phase 008.00 -300 300 0.01 X
RRE(3) ohm/phase 010.00 -300 300 0.01 X
K0(3) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01 X
K0 Angle(3) deg 000.00 -180 180 0.01 X
Delay(3) s 001.00 0 10 0.01 X
X(4/OR) ohm/phase 015.00 -300 300 0.01 X
R(4/OR) ohm/phase 004.00 -300 300 0.01 X
RR(4/OR) ohm/phase 010.00 -300 300 0.01 X
RRE(4/OR) ohm/phase 012.00 -300 300 0.01 X
K0(4/OR) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01 X
K0Angle(4/OR) deg 000.00 -180 180 0.01 X
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
28 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Text Unit Default Min Max Step Setting
Delay(4/OR) s 001.50 0 10 0.01 X
X(Back) ohm/phase -006.00 -300 0 0.01 X
R(Back) ohm/phase -002.00 -300 0 0.01 X
RR(Back) ohm/phase -006.00 -300 0 0.01 X
RRE(Back) ohm/phase -008.00 -300 0 0.01 X
Table 40: VT supervision
Text Unit Default Min Max Step Setting
VT Sup Mode off (Select) X
VT Blk Del off (Select) X
VT Sup Deb Del off (Select) X
U0 minVTSup UN 000.20 0.01 0.5 0.01 X
U2 minVTSup UN 000.20 0.01 0.5 0.01 X
I0 minVTSup IN 000.07 0.01 0.5 0.01 X
I2 minVTSup IN 000.07 0.01 0.5 0.01 X
Table 41: Trip schemes
Text Unit Default Min Max Step Setting
ComMode off (Select) X
TripMode 1Ph trip (Select) X
SOTFMode off (Select) X
SOTF10sec off (Select) X
Weak off (Select) X
Unblock off (Select) X
Echo off (Select) X
TransBl off (Select) X
t1Block s 000.07 0 0.25 0.01 X
t1TransBl s 000.05 0 0.25 0.01 X
t2TransBl s 003.00 0 10 0.01 X
t1EvolFaults s 003.00 0 10 0.01 X
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 29Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.1.5 ParametersGUID-94E19491-6E52-44C9-813E-33C133EF4CC3 v1
Table 42: General
Parameter Description
ParSet 1..4 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function is active.
CT Neutral Side of the CTs on which the star-point is formed (current direction).Choice:
• Bus side• Line side
Ref. Length Reactance (secondary value) to be used as reference length of the line.
U input Indicates the first VT input assigned to the three-phase voltages. Fixed settingChannel 5 of the A/D module.
I input Indicates the first CT input assigned to the three-phase currents. Fixed settingChannel 1 of the A/D module.
I0 input,I0P input
Indicates the CT input assigned to the neutral current. This is used for
• the external acquisition of the neutral current of the line or• the neutral current of the parallel circuit of a double-circuit line. Fixed setting
Channel 4 of the analogue input module.
I O/C backup Phase current pick-up setting of the backup overcurrent unit. The function isblocked when set to zero.
Delay O/C backup Tripping delay of the O/C backup function.
Time PS block Determines the maximum blocking time of the power swing blocking function. Thepower swing blocking function is blocked when set to zero.
Table 43: Starting
Text Explanation
StartMode Choice:
• UZ (underimpedance)• I > (overcurrent)
PhaseSelMode Phase preference for cross-country faults in systems with Petersen coils andungrounded systems:Choice:
• Solidly grounded• L1L3L2 (L1) cyclic• L3L1L2 (L3) cyclic• L1L3L2 acyclic• L1L2L3 acyclic• L3L2L1 acyclic• L3L1L2 acyclic• L2L1L3 acyclic• L2L3L1 acyclic• Directional OR
GndFaultMode Method of detecting ground faults:Choice:
• I0: (IE>3I0min) AND (IE>0.25 Imax)• I0 OR U0: (IE>3I0min) AND (IE>0.25 Imax) OR (UE>3U0min)• I0(I2): (IE>3I0min) AND (IE>0.23 I2)• I0(I2) OR U0: (IE>3I0min) AND (IE>0.23 I2) OR (UE>3U0min)
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
30 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Text Explanation
IStart Pick-up setting of the overcurrent starters (only effective providing starting modeset to I>)
Imin Setting of the low current check feature for enabling the protection.
3I0min Neutral current (3I0) setting for detecting ground faults.
3U0min Neutral voltage (3U0) setting for detecting ground faults.
XA Reactive reach of the impedance characteristic in the tripping direction.
XB Reactive reach of the impedance characteristic in the restraint direction.
RA Resistive reach of the impedance characteristic in the tripping direction.
RB Resistive reach of the impedance characteristic in the restraint direction.
RLoad Resistive reach for avoiding load encroachment.
AngleLoad Limit phase-angle for avoiding load encroachment.
Uweak Phase-to-neutral setting for detecting a weak infeed or a dead line for enablingmanually energizing the line. The function is blocked when set to zero.
18000001-IEC19000403-1-en.vsdx
X
R
27°
27°
XA
- XB
RA
- RB
RLoad - RLoad
Directional
(tripping direction)
Load angle
Direc-
tional
OR
IEC19000403 V1 EN-US
Figure 2: Underimpedance starter settings
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 31Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Table 44: Measurement
Text Explanation
Del (Def) Operating time of the final stage (starter).
K0m Value of the zero-sequence compensation factor for a parallel circuit (ratio of themutual impedance to three times the positive-sequence impedance);
m0 1Z 3 Z. The mutual impedance is not taken into account for a setting
of zero.
K0mAngle Phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation factor for a parallel circuit
m0 1Z 3 ZArg
ILoad The inclination of the characteristic changes from 7° to 14° when the load currentexceeds the setting of ILoad.
ILoad = 0.01..1.99 IN Switches as described
ILoad = 0 Constant inclination of 14°
ILoad = 2 Constant inclination of 7°
UminFault Minimum voltage at which the fault voltage is used for determining fault direction.
MemDirMode Procedure to be followed after decay of the memory voltage and no voltage isavailable for measurement:
• Blocks• Trips• Conditional trip
Only trips, if the directions during the present and the preceding times steps are inopposition.
DefDirMode Response at the end of the final time step (definitive time):
• Non-direct.: Trips for faults in both directions• Forwards: Trips only for faults in the forwards direction
BlockZ1 Zone 1 measurement blocking:
• off• on
X(n) Pick-up line reactance for Zone (n):
• X < 0 for restraint direction• X = 0 disables the zone (Zone 1 cannot be disabled)
R(n) Pick-up line resistance for Zone (n); the sign must be the same as for X (n).
RR(n) Resistive reach (incl. arc resistance) of Zone (n) for phase faults; the sign must bethe same as for X (n).
RRE(n) Resistive reach (incl. arc resistance) of Zone (n) for ground faults; the sign must bethe same as for X (n).
K0(n) Value of the zero-sequence compensation factor for E/F’s in Zone (n);
0 1 13Z Z Z .
K0Angle(n) Phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation factor for E/F’s in Zone (n);
0 1 13Arg Z Z Z
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
32 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Text Explanation
Delay(n) Operating time for Zone (n).
X(BACK) Pick-up line reactance for the reverse zone:X = 0 Zone disabled.
R(BACK) Pick-up line resistance for the reverse zone.
RR(BACK) Resistive reach for phase faults in the reverse zone.
RRE(BACK) Resistive reach for ground faults in the reverse zone.
18000002--1-en.vsdx
R
7°
14°
X(n)
R(n) RR(n) RRE(n) - X(n)/8
- RR(n)/2
- RRE(n)/2
27°
27°
X
IEC19000404 V1 EN-US
Figure 3: Distance measurement settings
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 33Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
18000003--1-en.vsdx
14°
R
X
27°
27°
7°
- RRE(BACK) - RR(BACK) - R(BACK)
- X(BACK)
X(BACK)/8
RR(BACK)/2
RRE(BACK)/2
IEC19000405 V1 EN-US
Figure 4: Reverse zone settings
18000004--1-en.vsdx
S1
X
S2
S3
S4
SR
Starter, resp. Final zone (Delay (Def))
R
IEC19000406 V1 EN-US
Figure 5: Starting and distance measurement characteristic
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
34 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Table 45: VT supervision
Text Explanation
VTSupBlkMode off: Function disabled
ZeroSeq:
0 0U I
NegSeq:
2 2U I
Zero × NegSeq:
0 0 2 2U I U I
Special:
2 0 2U I I
VTSupBlkDel Delayed blocking of the distance function (12 s) for operation of the VTsupervision.
• off immediate blocking• on delayed blocking
VTSupDebDel Delay (1 s) for resetting blocking by the VT supervision.
• off immediate reset• on delayed reset
U0min VTSup Pick-up setting of the neutral voltage (U0) for VT supervision referred to therated VT voltage 100/√3 or 200/√3.
U2min VTSup Pick-up setting of the negative sequence voltage (U2) for VT supervisionreferred to the rated VT voltage 100/√3 or 200/√3.
I0min VTSup Pick-up setting of the neutral current (I0) for VT supervision.
I2min VTSup Pick-up setting of the NPS current (I2) for VT supervision.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 35Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Table 46: Trip schemes
Text Explanation
ComMode Type of transfer tripping scheme:
• off• PUTT NONDIR• PUTT FWD• PUTT OR2• POTT• BLOCK OR
TripMode Type of tripping (single or three-phase):
• 1PhTrip: single-phase tripping (for single-phase autoreclosure)• 3PhTrip: three-phase tripping in all cases• 3PhTripDel3: single-phase tripping (for single-phase autoreclosure) up to the
end of Delay (3), then three-phase tripping
SOTFMode Operating mode of the switch-onto-fault function:
• off• Non-dir: non-directional underimpedance starting (recommended setting)• Forward OR2: directional with overreaching (Zone 2, if over- reaching
disabled) or non-directional after decay of any memory voltage
SOFT10sec Enables the 10 s delay for the switch-onto-fault function:
• off (t = 200 ms)• on (t = 10 s)
Weak Enables the Weak infeed logic for the PUTT or POTT transfer tripping modes(Uweak must also be set):
• off• on
Unblock Enables the deblocking logic:
• off• on (only suitable for PLC)
Echo Enables the Echo logic for the POTT transfer tripping mode:
• off• on
TransBl Enables the Transient blocking logic (stabilization for reversal of power directionon double-circuit lines) for the POTT and BLOCK OR (overreaching blockingscheme) transfer tripping modes:
• off• on
t1Block Waiting time for signal receive for the BLOCK OR (overreaching blocking scheme).
t1TransBl Time 1 for the TRANSBL (transient blocking) mode. Delay for faults after a fault wasdetected in the reverse direction.
t2TransBl Time 2 for the TRANSBL (transient blocking) mode. The logic remains enabled forthe time t2 after a fault was detected in the reverse direction.
t1EvolFaults Time for discriminating evolving faults (three-phase trip for evolving faults duringthis time setting)
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
36 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.1.6 Configuration
5.1.6.1 GeneralGUID-4860E469-1FF3-441D-B6B9-C6A13A87149D v1
The first parameter in the sub-menu General is Ref length. It is used to display the faultdistance when the function trips and has no influence of the protection function itself. Theparameter states the reactance of the reference length (in secondary Ω/ph per unit length)and may be set to display km, miles, percent line length and so on, that is,
.Distanceref. length
measX
For example,
• To display fault distance in kmSecondary reactance per km = 0.2 Ω/phaseRef. length = 0.2 Ω/phase
• To display fault distance in % of line lengthSecondary reactance of the line = 25 Ω/phase (1% = 0.25 Ω/phase)Ref. length = 0.25 Ω/phase
The setting of the parameter CT neutral depends on whether the star-point of the main CTs ison the line side or the busbar side. There are thus two possible settings Bus side or Line side.The Line side option is the one to choose, providing the protection is connected according tothe wiring diagram in the appendix.
The parameter Analogue inputs determines whether the neutral current isconnected to an analogue input (setting I0 input) or is derived internally. Theinformation icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.
5.1.6.2 StartersGUID-3570AA0F-8DE9-46B0-B18F-21CFB453AF53 v1
The distance function provides for two methods of starting, that is, overcurrent orunderimpedance. The desired method is selected by appropriately setting the parameterStartMode in the STARTERS sub-menu.
Depending on the setting of the parameter DefDirMode, a starter can also trip on its own afterthe time Delay (Def).
Overcurrent startersGUID-EE5ECD9D-422E-46A4-A02A-E7D61151EFD5 v1
The overcurrent starters are enabled by selecting OC for the parameter StartMode. The pick-up level of the overcurrent starters is determined by the setting of the parameter IStart. Thecorresponding setting range is from 0.5 to 10 IN, in steps of 0.01 IN. The setting of IStart mustbe sufficiently above the maximum load current to avoid any risk of mal-operation undernormal load conditions. Note that all currents greater than 80% of the highest phase current(and also the enabling current Imin) are taken into account by the phase selection function.When determining the maximum load current it must be considered that:
• In the case of a double-circuit line, the load current IB can briefly reach double its normalvalue when one circuit is tripped.
• Ground faults can cause additional balancing currents IA in the healthy phases.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 37Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
It is important for an overcurrent starter, which has picked up, to reliably reset at themaximum load current IBmax, if for example the fault is tripped by a downstream protection.Taking due account of the reset ratio of 0.95, the lowest permissible setting is given by:
max
min( ) 1.250.95
B A
N
I IIstart
I
The maximum setting (IStart)max is derived from the minimum fault current IK for a fault atthe end of the next section of line:
max min( ) K NIstart I I
Should the above relationships result in (IStart)max being lower than (IStart)min, theunderimpedance starters must be used instead.
Underimpedance startersGUID-AB1404EC-2679-4CA9-AA8B-F84A320C432E v1
The underimpedance starters are enabled by selecting UZ as the StartMode parameter. Thefollowing parameters then have to be set:
• XA• XB• RA• RB• RLoad• AngleLoad
The parameters RLoad and AngleLoad define the permissible load area.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
38 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
18000005--1-en.vsdx
X
AngleLoad
XA
XB
RA
RB
RLoad
-RLoad
R
IEC19000407 V1 EN-US
Figure 6: Underimpedance starting characteristic
Because of the method used to represent impedances by the processor program, theimpedance settings should not be set higher than necessary, otherwise the resolution for lowimpedances will be reduced.
Minimum permissible reach of the underimpedance starters
The starting units must reliably pick-up for a fault towards the end of the next section of line(backup zone). If the backup protection of the adjacent section of line is not necessary, thestarters must be set to at least 1.3 times the impedance of the protected line. In the case ofshort lines, fault resistance becomes a factor to be taken into account.
Maximum permissible reach of the underimpedance starters
• The setting must take account of the considerable increase in the load current of thehealthy circuit of a double-circuit line, when a fault on one circuit is tripped.
• To ensure that the phase selection is correct for single-phase autoreclosure, the startersin the healthy phases must not pick up for a ground fault on one of the phases (in spite ofany balancing currents which may occur).
The resulting limits are as follows:
• Solidly grounded systems
max
Ω/ph2 ( )set
B A
UZ
I I
• Ungrounded systems or system with Petersen coils
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 39Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
max
Ω/ph2 1.25
Vset
B
UZ
I
where:
• Zset is the maximum value of the impedance, that is, the maximum value of the expression:
2 2 2 2 or XA RA XB RB
• U is the lowest phase voltage of the healthy phases for aground fault on one phase (U =0.85 × min. system voltage). The factor 0.85 takes account of a negligibly small zero-sequence source impedance.
• Uv is the lowest phase-to-phase system voltage.• 1.25 is the safety factor• 2 is the factor, which takes account of the fact that phase currents and not phase-to-
phase currents are used.
These requirements are generally fulfilled for most applications. If the first inequality is notsatisfied, the right-hand side must be expressed vectorially and compared with theunderimpedance starting characteristic in relation to the setting RLoad. The healthy phasesmust be checked for the case of a ground fault.
Current release (low-current check)GUID-73E85CC0-A645-4715-B6C2-D4A775931D71 v1
For a phase to be included in the phase selection, it must be conducting a current higher thanImin. A typical setting is 0.2 IN.
Ground fault detectorGUID-052C389C-6C20-4342-BD93-8C51FCC560F8 v1
There are five alternative methods of detecting ground faults; the desired one shall beselected by the setting of the parameter GndFaultMode. The neutral current can either be usedon its own or in conjunction with the neutral voltage. The following operating modes areavailable:
• I0: (IE > 3I0min) AND (IE > 0.25 Imax)• I0 OR U0: (IE > 3I0min) AND (IE > 0.25 Imax) OR (UE > 3U0min)• I0 AND U0: (IE > 3I0min) AND (IE > 0.25 Imax) OR (UE > 3 U0min)• I0(I2): (IE > 3I0min) AND (IE > 0.23 I2)• I0(I2) OR U0 : (IE > 3I0min) AND (IE > 0.23 I2) OR (UE > 3U0min)
The criterion for the highest 3I0min setting is:
• The ground fault detector must pick up for all ground faults within the reach of theunderimpedance starters in solidly grounded power systems and all cross-country faultsin ungrounded or impedance grounded power systems.
The criteria for the lowest 3I0min setting are:
• The ground fault detector must not pick up for a ground fault on ungrounded systems orsystems with Petersen coils
• The ground fault detector must not pick up for phase faults, although CT errors can causefalse neutral currents.
The recommended setting is 3I0min = 0.5 IN.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
40 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Should it not be possible to find a setting, which satisfies both theseconditions, the neutral voltage (3U0min) must be used for measurement inaddition to the neutral current.
Phase preference logicGUID-C3BD8775-B46E-437E-B3B9-F082CFAB583E v1
The desired phase preference logic for cross-country faults is chosen with the aid of theparameter PhaseSelMode.
In solidly grounded systems, the PhaseSelMode parameter is disabled by setting it to Solidground or Forward OR.
It is essential for all the relays in ungrounded systems and systems with Petersen coils to beset to the same phase preference logic. The logic used in the system must be known beforeone of the eight alternative schemes can be selected:
• L1L3L2(L1) — cyclic• L3L1L2(L3) — cyclic• L1L3L2 — acyclic• L1L2L3 — acyclic• L3L2L1 — acyclic• L3L1L2 — acyclic• L2L1L3 — acyclic• L2L3L1 — acyclic
Undervoltage starters (Uweak)GUID-2E537DE1-4FD1-476E-A15F-3F0354C6C425 v1
The undervoltage starters are used in conjunction with the switch-onto-fault function and thetransfer tripping schemes (POTT and PUTT NONDIR). The corresponding pick-up value is set inrelation to the rated voltage with the aid of the parameter Uweak, which has a setting range of0 to 2 UN in steps of 0.01.
5.1.6.3 MeasurementGUID-1C206723-EE56-4815-829C-56FD2084967D v1
All the settings for the impedance measuring zones are to be found in the Measurement sub-menu.
Determining the distance zonesGUID-05267329-6581-44F6-A236-96D275BADFAC v1
Before it is possible to determine the reaches of the distance zones, the impedances andphase-angles of the line sections during faults must be known. Typical settings for the variouszone reaches along the line are given below:
18000006-IEC19000408-1-en.vsdx
A B C
a b
1
2
3 Z = 0.85 (a + k · b )
b
b
2
Z = 0.85 (a + k · b ) 2 1
Z = 0.85 · a 1
Z = 1.2 · a ÜR
IEC19000408 V1 EN-US
Figure 7: Typical settings for the reaches of distance relay zones
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 41Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
where:
• Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4 are the impedance reach of the various zones (Ω/ph).• ZOR is the impedance reach of the overreaching zone (Ω/ph).• k ≥ 1 is the factor to take the apparent increase of line impedance seen by a relay due to an
intermediate infeed into account.• a, b are the impedance of the corresponding section of line (Ω).
Example for calculating k:
Check the overreach for k > 1 if the infeed B is not in operation.
18000007-IEC19000409-1-en.vsdx
A B C
D
3 2 1 4
5
IA' + IB'
IA' ~ ~
IEC19000409 V1 EN-US
Figure 8: Calculation of k
' '
1A B
A
I Ik
I
where:
• IA' is the maximum fault current possible• IB' is the minimum fault current possible• 1...5 are the distance relays
Calculating the secondary line impedances
The primary values calculated from the grading table for the line impedances have to beconverted to secondary values. These are obtained by applying the following relationship:
LP LPLS
ZU
I
Z ZZ
KK
K
where:
• ZLp is the primary positive-sequence line impedance.• ZLs is the secondary positive-sequence line impedance.• KU is the main VT ratio.• KI is the main CT ratio.• KZ is the impedance ratio.
The same applies to the conversion of the resistances and reactances.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
42 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
The impedance characteristic is defined independently for each of the four distance zones(Zone 4 is used alternatively for the overreaching zone) by the following parameters (i = 1 to 4):
• X — (i)• R — (i)• RR — (i)• RRE — (i)• k0 — (i)• k0Ang — (i)• Delay — (i)
18000008-IEC19000410-1-en.vsdx
X
R
7°
14°
X
RRE R RR - X/8
-RRE/2
-RR/2
27°
27°
IEC19000410 V1 EN-US
Figure 9: Distance measuring characteristic
Impedance setting ranges:
• X -10 to 20 Ω/phase in steps of 0.01• R -300 to 300 Ω/phase in steps of 0.01• RR -10 to 15 Ω/phase in steps of 0.01• RRE -10 to 15 Ω/phase in steps of 0.01
When X of a zone is set to zero, regardless of the settings of its other parameters, this zoneand all following zones with the exception of the final zone are blocked. For example if zone X(3) is set to zero, zones 3 and 4 are blocked. If in the present example the user wants to blockjust zone 3, this can be achieved indirectly by setting zone 3 to all the settings determined forzone 4 and blocking zone 4 by setting X (4) = 0 (that is, zone 3 functions as zone 4). Zone 1 canonly be disabled by the parameter Block Z1 or the binary input ExtBlock Z1.
The direction of measurement is reversed for negative settings of X, R, RR and RRE.
Allowing for arc resistance:
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 43Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
The settings RRE and RR make provision for fault resistance in ground fault and phase-to-phase fault loops. The setting takes the ground fault resistance comprising the arc resistanceand the pylon footing resistance in relation to the line resistance into account.
Typical settings lie in the range RR(E)/X = 0.5...3.
The arc resistance RB can be calculated according to A.R. van C. Warrington as follows:
1.4
28700B
dRI
• d is the length of arc in m.• I is the current in A.• RB is the arc resistance in Ω.
Since the unit is Ω/ph, the fault resistance appears differently in the impedance planeaccording to the type of fault. Where the value of the fault resistance RF in Ω is known, it hasto be entered in the R/X diagram as follows:
phase-to-groundfault: F 0R R / 1 k
phase-to-phase fault: FR R / 2
three-phase fault: FR R / 3
It is for this reason that fault resistance is compensated individually the parameters RRE andRR. The parameter RR will generally be set lower than RRE, because the phase-to-phase faultresistance is normally very low.
R F
R F R
F R
F
R F
Phase to ground fault
Phase to phase fault
Three phase fault
18000009-IEC19000411-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000411 V1 EN-US
Figure 10: Faults with arc resistance
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
44 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Load discrimination
The load area defined by the underimpedance parameters RLoad and AngleLoad is taken intoaccount by starting and measuring characteristics. The distance function can only trip, if thefault impedance lies within the underimpedance starting characteristic.
S4
S1
S2
S3
SR
Starting
R
X
18000010-IEC19000412-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000412 V1 EN-US
Figure 11: Load discrimination
The load impedance area is only formed when the underimpedance starter (UZ)is in operation. It does not exist when starting is provided by the overcurrentstarter (OC).
Zero-sequence compensation of the protected line
The magnitude and phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation factor are set individuallyfor each zone using parameters k0 and k0Ang. The k0 factors are calculated from the positive-sequence impedance ZL and the zero-sequence impedance Z0L of the line:
00
( )1/ 3 L L
L
Z Zk x
Z
00 1/ 3 ( ) / )L L Lk x Z Z Z
Range: 0 to 8 in steps of 0.01
0 0 0arctan ( ) / ( ) arctan ( / )L L L L L Lk Ang X X R R X R
Range: -180° to +90° in steps of 0.01
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 45Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Zero-sequence compensation of double-circuit lines
The magnitude and phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation factor for a double-circuit line are set using parameters k0m and k0mAng. This compensation only applies toZones 1 and 2, the overreaching zone and the reverse zone.
Directional unit
Each distance zone has its own directional measuring unit. The voltage used for measurementdepends on the amplitude of the fault voltage in relation to the parameter UminFault. Thefault voltage is used, providing it is higher than the setting of UminFault and a voltage derivedfrom the healthy voltage and the memory voltage is used when it falls below. Therecommended settings are 0.1 UN for conventional VTs.
Should correct determination of direction not be possible (reference voltage too low ormemory voltage decayed), the setting of the parameter MemDirMode determines whether theprotection blocks or trips:
• Block — Protection blocks all zones (definitive zone only if directional)• Trip — Protection trips• Cond. trip — Protection blocks unless the instantaneous and preceding zones are in
opposite directions, in which case the protection trips.
Overreaching zone (OR)GUID-9E13EFC1-370B-4EC2-A33B-72FB1A9E9C5B v1
The settings including the designation 4/OR (X (4/OR) delay (4/OR)) can be used either for afourth measuring zone or a completely independent overreaching zone (but not for both at thesame time) by appropriately setting the parameter Delay (4/OR).
In applications requiring a fourth zone, the measuring unit of the second zone is used foroverreaching. An overreaching zone is necessary for the switch-onto-fault and zone extensionlogics and for overreaching transfer tripping schemes.
Reverse zone (BACK)GUID-5C7E7430-152E-46A3-9CA7-2CEC0AE6519B v1
A reverse measuring zone is used in a blocking scheme and also the logic for detecting areversal of fault energy direction. It is set using the parameters X (BACK), R (BACK), RR (BACK)and RRE (BACK) which have setting ranges from 0 to 300 Ω/ph.
Note that:
• for underimpedance starting (UZ):With the exception of the load discrimination defined by the parameters RLoad andAngleLoad, the reverse zone operates independently of the starters.
• for overcurrent starting (OC):The reverse zone is only in operation when an overcurrent starter (IStart) has picked up.
• The binary input (Ext Blk UZ) blocks operation regardless of the starter mode for thereverse zone.
• Signal output: Meas Bward• Measurement of the reverse zone only takes place while the first zone is active, that is, the
Meas Bward signal resets at the latest at the end the second time step.
Time steps (Delay)GUID-74E9FA23-CFF7-4A68-A9A9-68480D59B009 v1
The operating time of every activated distance zone (parameter X <> 0) is determined by theparameter Delay, which has a setting range of 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.01. The parameter Delay(4/OR) is also associated with a logic, which determines whether it applies to Zone 4 or to theoverreaching zone, that is, if Delay (4/OR) < Delay (2), it applies to the overreaching zone,otherwise to Zone 4.
The set times must satisfy the following relationships:
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
46 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
• Delay (1) < Delay (2) < Delay (3) < Delay (4) < Delay(Def)• Delay (OR) < Delay (2)
When grading the operating times of several distance relays, the minimum grading timeshould not be less than the sum of the circuit-breaker operating time plus 150 ms (reset time +operating time of the measuring system + safety margin).
Recommended timer settings:
• Zone 1: normally instantaneous• Zone 2: Delay (2) is normally set to the sum of relay and circuit breaker operating times,
arc extinction time, signal transmission time and a tolerance margin, which amounts toabout 0.25 to 0.5 s. The tolerance includes an allowance for sequential trip-ping.
• Zone 3: Delay (3) is set to about 2 × Delay (2).• Zone 4: Delay (4) or Delay(Def) is normally set to at least 4 × Delay (2).
Special cases may require settings, which deviate considerably from the aboverecommendations.
The time steps of zones (1 to 4) must have settings less than Delay(Def).
5.1.6.4 Definitive zone (Def)GUID-42A75BFC-871D-41BB-A9C0-327B47EE2AB2 v1
The definitive (or fifth) zone is subject to the same parameters as the underimpedancestarters (that is, XA, XB, RA, RB, RLoad and AngleLoad).
The corresponding time step is defined by the parameter Delay (Def).
18000011-IEC19000413-1-en.vsdx
X
Load Angle
XA
-XB
RA
-RB
RLoad
-RLoad
R
27o
27o
(In tripping
direction)
IEC19000413 V1 EN-US
Figure 12: Definitive zone characteristic
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 47Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
The parameter DefDirMode determines the response at the end of the definitive time. It can beset to be either directional (in tripping direction) or non-directional.
There is still a definitive zone even using the overcurrent starter (OC), but onlywith respect to the parameters Delay (Def) and DefDirMode.
5.1.6.5 Backup overcurrent unit (O/C Backup Protection)GUID-20B5299D-4AF0-474F-A39C-5B2CEC91FFB8 v1
The settings for the backup overcurrent unit are made via the sub-menu O/C BACKUPPROTECTION. The setting of the parameter I O/C determines the pick-up level, which can bechosen in steps of 0.1 IN between 0 and 10 IN. The associated time delay is set in steps of 0.1 sbetween 0 and 10 s by means of the parameter Delay O/C.
The pick-up signal of the overcurrent unit is also used by the STUB protection. If the function isbeing used for this purpose, that is, the binary I/P Isol open is at logical 1, the tripping time isfixed at 25 ms.
5.1.6.6 VT supervisionGUID-251A8D53-AFE5-46E8-A370-18F24C8A0401 v1
The parameters for setting the VT supervision function are located in the sub-menu VTSUPERVISON. One of four different operating modes can be selected by using VTSupMode.The function processes zero and negative-sequence components, which are either used ontheir own (ZeroSeq and NegSeq) or combined (Zero×NegSeq and Spec).
ZeroSeq0 0U I
NegSeq2 2U I
Zero×NegSeq 0 0 2 2U I U I
Spec 2 0 2U I I
The four pick-up values are the settings of the parameters U0min VTSup, U2min VTSup, I0minVTSup and I2min VTSup. They can be set between 0 and 2 UN (or IN) in steps of 0.01. The basicsettings are 0.2 UN for the voltage and 0.07 IN for the current.
Only the NegSeq or Spec options are available in ungrounded systems.
Upon operating, the VT supervision function is normally required to immediately block thedistance protection function. Provision is made, however, for blocking the distance functionafter a delay of 12 s by setting the parameter VTSupBlkDel. This parameter is normally set incases where only the overcurrent starters are in use.
If the VT supervision function remains picked up for longer than 12 s, it resets only after a delay(1 s). Should a fault give rise to zero or negative-sequence current components, it resetsimmediately.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
48 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
The parameter VTSupDebDel (deblocking) enables the reset delay to be continuously enabledregardless of current.
Table 47: Recommended setting
Parameter Grounded system Ungrounded system
VTSupDebDel enabled disabled
The signal VTSup indicates that the distance function is being blocked by the VT supervisionand VTSupDel that the 12 s delay is running.
5.1.6.7 Tripping logicGUID-09BA469C-565E-49EF-B2C0-080319525FA6 v1
The Trip Schemes tab gives access to the parameters for determining the tripping logic.
The various transfer tripping schemes are selected by setting the parameter ComMode (3 xPUTT, POTT and OVERREACHING BLOCKING schemes). The possible settings are given below.The settings for the respective scheme only appear after the appropriate communicationmode has been selected.
PUTT NONDIR
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (non-directional)
Weak enables the weak infeed logic.
PUTT FWD
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (in line direction)
No other parameters.
PUTT OR2
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (overreaching zone/Zone 2)
Unblock selects the enabling logic for communications channel failure.
POTT
Permissive overreaching transfer tripping
• Weak enables the weak infeed logic.• Unblock selects the enabling logic for communications channel failure. Echo enables the
echo logic.• TransBl enables the logic for reversal of fault energy.• t1TransBl tripping signal duration by the wrong energy direction logic.• t2TransBl max. operating time of the wrong energy direction logic.
BLOCK OR
Blocking scheme
• TransBl enables the logic for reversal of fault energy.• t1Block time allowed for the receipt of a PLC signal.• t1TransBl tripping signal duration by the wrong energy direction logic.• t2TransBl max. operating time of the wrong energy direction logic.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 49Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
TripMode
Depending on the setting of the parameter TripMode:
• tripping is phase-selective, controlled by the binary input 1PolAR (for 1phTrip), alwaysthree-phase (for 3phTrip)
• tripping is three-phase after the time Delay (3) (for 3phTripDel3)
SOTF Mode
Access is gained to the switch-onto-fault logic settings by selecting the parameter SOTFMode. The alternatives presented are whether the switch-onto-fault logic should trip on thebasis of the non-directional underimpedance starters or the overreaching zone.
This logic is enabled either by the undervoltage function delayed by 10 s or 200 ms or thebinary inputs Deadline and Manual close.
Two signaling outputs Start SOTF and Trip SOTF are associated with the switch-onto-faultlogic. Start SOTF is intended for blocking the autoreclosure function and Trip SOTF signalsthat tripping was by the switch-onto-fault logic.
SOTF 10 sec
The parameter SOTF10sec determines whether the undervoltage function and the binary inputDeadline are enabled after 10 s (on) or 200 ms (off). off indicates switching onto a fault afterfast autoreclosure (Fast AR). Tripping in this case is thus based on the decisions of thestarters alone.
t1EvolFaults
The setting of the parameter t1EvolFaults determines the time during which the detection ofan evolving fault causes a three-phase trip.
5.1.6.8 Power-swing blockingGUID-290AFE08-EF8B-49ED-BB97-D443777923B7 v1
Only the parameter tPSblock for the time during which the power-swing blocking signal ismaintained has to be set in the POWER-SWING BLOCKING sub-menu. The setting range is 0 to10 s in steps of 0.01. Tripping is enabled again at the latest at the end of this time.
The power-swing blocking function is disabled when tPSblock is set to zero or a logical 1 isapplied to the binary input Ext Blk PSB.
5.1.6.9 Supplementary information for binary inputsGUID-1BA1A03D-546C-4875-8F2C-AC972DAE2406 v1
ChgMeasDir
Applying a signal to this input reverses the direction of measurement for the entire distanceprotection function (all zones).
Ext Blk Dist
This input blocks the entire distance protection function. Blocking is signaled by Dist blockedand after 12 s by DelDistBlk. Only the backup overcurrent protection (I O/C) then remainsactive.
Ext UZ Blk
This input blocks the underimpedance starters, the neutral voltage starter (U0), themeasurement for Weak and the reverse measurement. The overcurrent starters (OC) remain inoperation.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
50 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Ext Blk PSB
This input blocks the power-swing blocking function.
Ext Blk O/C backup
This input blocks the backup overcurrent protection (O/C Back-up Protection).
Deadline
The signal applied to this input is needed by the switch-onto-fault logic to indicate to thedistance function that the line is dead before the circuit-breaker is closed. It is used for theswitch-onto-fault logic providing the VTs are on the busbars.
Manual Close
Prior to manually closing the circuit-breaker, this signal enables the switch-onto-fault logic andblocks the VT supervision function.
ZExtension, ZExtensionAR
The overreaching logic permits instantaneous tripping within the overreaching zone. It isenabled via the binary input ZExtension or ZExtensionAR. For this purpose, the outputZExtension of the autoreclosure function is connected to the input ZExtensionAR.
Isol open
This input is required by the STUB protection to ascertain whether an isolator is open or not.
ComRec
This input is needed for the external signal ComRec (signal received by PLC, optical fiber link orpoint-to-point radio).
ComFail
This input signals to the protection that the PLC channel has failed.
1PolAR
This input permits single-phase tripping to take place and is used in conjunction with single orthree-phase autoreclosure schemes.
See Section 5.8 for the connection to the autoreclosure function.
ExtBlkSOTF
This input is needed in cases where the switch-onto-fault logic is not enabled after anautoreclosure. See Section 5.8 for the connection to the autoreclosure function.
ExtBlkHF
This input blocks the reception of an intertripping signal. It is used for coordinatingcommunication channel signals when in a solidly grounded system, the distance protectionand the E/F protection use the same channel. It must be connected to the RecBlk signal of theground fault function.
ExtBlock Z1
This input blocks measurement in zone 1.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 51Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.1.7 Technical description
5.1.7.1 Starters
Starting procedureGUID-98795D77-46E5-4F07-B61F-214818EBAD2C v1
The REB500sys distance function is equipped with either over-current or underimpedancestarters. The setting of the parameter StartMode determines which of the two is active.
A starter must pick up at least twice before its signal is processed (for phase selection,starting timers, signaling etc.). Should a starter pick up only sporadically, only the backwardsmeasuring system and ancillary functions such as displaying measurements etc. are enabled.
Starting signals do not reset unless all the starters have reset.
Overcurrent starters (Istart)GUID-6F77DAB8-B663-4091-872B-A2B590008022 v1
The variables at the inputs of the overcurrent starters are the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3 andthe residual current IE (3I0), respectively the neutral voltage UE (3U0). Firstly, a logic determinesImax, that is, the highest of the three-phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3.
If the value of Imax exceeds the setting of the parameter IStart (overcurrent starters), each ofthe phase currents Iph is checked to determine whether it exceeds the setting of the parameterImin (current enable) and also 80% of Imax.
In the case of the ground current IE, it is checked whether it exceeds the setting of theparameter 3I0min and also 25% of Imax. Depending on the setting of the parameter And FaultMode (I0, I0 AND U0, I0 OR U0), it is checked at the same time whether the residual voltage UEhas exceeded the setting of the parameter 3U0min (neutral voltage enable).
The logical signals L1, L2, L3 and E are accordingly set to logical 0 or logical 1. The kind of faultand the phases involved are thus determined. This information is needed for
• phase selection (determination of the loop to be measured)• signaling the kind of fault (signaling relays, LEDs etc.)• enabling signals for tripping and for starting the timers for the measuring zones
The starting signals reset if after measurement, the impedances of all six loops lie outside thefinal impedance zone (if only the overcurrent starters are in operation, there is nounderimpedance starting characteristic and relay response is determined by the setting of theovercurrent starter IStart).
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
52 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
START
N
N
Y
Imax > Istart
signal ph (L1, L2, L3)
set log.
signal E
END
AND
Y
Y
N
Y
N
IL1, IL2, IL3, IE, UE
Imax = highest value of IL1, IL2, IL3
Iph > Imin
Iph > 0.8 Imax
set log.
All phase currentsIL1, IL2, IL3
[(IE ≥ 3I0min) AND (IE ≥ 0.25Imax)]
AND/OR(UE ≥ 3U0min)
18000012-IEC19000414-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000414 V1 EN-US
Figure 13: Overcurrent starters (IStart)
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 53Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Underimpedance starters (UZ) up to initial pick-upGUID-69036925-0AA6-488C-A93E-410F5C113C09 v1
The variables at the inputs of the underimpedance starters are the phase currents IL1, IL2 andIL3 and the residual current IE (3I0) and the phase-to-neutral voltages UL1, UL2, UL3 and theneutral voltage UE (3U0).
UL1, UL2, UL3, UE, IL1, IL2, IL3, IE
START
(IE > 3I0min) AND (IE>0.25Imax) AND/OR (UE>3U0min)
(Iph > Imin
UPh Z = ----------- 2 x IPh
Z < Z Start
Set temp. signals “Ph”,
“E”
All Ph-0 loops
Loop = Phase selection
Uph Uph1 – Uph2 Z = ------------------- or Z = ------------------- 1x Iph + 1 x IE Iph1 – Iph2
Z < ZStart
Log.signals = temp.signals
END
Y
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
Y
N
(Iph1 > Imin) AND
(Iph2 > Imin
Uph1 – Uph2 Z = --------------------- Iph1 – Iph2
Z < Z Start
Set temp. signals “Ph1”,
“Ph2”
All Ph-Ph loops
Selectivity conditions
Set log. signals
N
Y
J
N
Y
18000013-IEC19000415-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000415 V1 EN-US
Figure 14: Underimpedance starters (UZ)
Depending on the setting of the parameter Gnd Fault Mode (I0, I0 AND U0, I0 OR U0), thefunction determines initially whether one or both of the ground fault criteria are fulfilled, thatis, whether the residual current IE exceeds the setting of the parameter 3I0min and/or theresidual voltage UE the setting of the parameter 3U0min. Should this be the case, the threephase-to-ground loops are measured first, otherwise just the three phase-to-phase loops.
The three phase-to-ground loops are processed as follows:
If IL1 (or IL2, or IL3) is greater than Imin, the corresponding loops are enabled and the loopimpedances calculated as follows:
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
54 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
11
1
LL
L
UZI
(uncompensated)
22
22L
LL
UZI
(uncompensated)
33
3
LL
L
UZI
(uncompensated)
All uncompensated impedances ZL1, ZL2 and ZL3 are compared with the starting characteristicand temporarily set the logical signals Ph and E (no display). An impedance loop is selected onthe basis of these signals (loop = selected phase).
Phase-ground-loop
For a phase-ground-loop, the impedance is calculated with a compensation factor k0 = 1:
Ph 0
Ph 0Ph E
UZ
I 1 I
For example:
L
L
1L10
1 E
UZ
I 1 I
Phase-to-phase loop
For a phase-to-phase loop, the impedance is calculated using phase-to-phase variables:
Ph PhPh Ph
Ph Ph
UZ
I
For example:
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 55Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
1 21 2
1 2
L LL L
L L
U UZ
I I
If the impedance (Z) calculated for the loop determined by the phase selection logic lies withinthe underimpedance starting characteristic (Zstart), the loop is used for measurement.
The logical signals are needed for:
• signaling the kind of fault (signaling relays, LEDs etc.)• enabling signals for tripping• starting the timers for the measuring zones
The three phase-to-phase loops are processed as follows:
Providing Iph1 and Iph2 (IL1 and IL2, IL2 and IL3, or IL3 and IL1) are higher than Imin, thecorresponding loops are enabled and the impedances are calculated as follows:
1 21 2
1 2
L LL L
L L
U UZ
I I
1 21 2
1 2
L LL L
L L
U UZ
I I
3 13 1
3 1
L LL L
L L
U UZ
I I
Comparison of the three starting impedances eliminates the healthy loops (selectivitycondition).
If just one of the loop impedances lies within the underimpedance starting characteristic(Zstart), only the signals (L1 and L2), or (L2 and L3), or (L3 and L1) would be set to logical 1.
If more than one of the loop impedances lie within the under-impedance startingcharacteristic, the signals L1 and L2 and L3 are set to logical 1.
The kind of fault is thus determined, information which is needed for.
• phase selection (determination of the loop to be measured)• signaling the kind of fault (signaling relays, LEDs etc.)• enabling signals for tripping• starting the timers
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
56 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Phase selectionGUID-F5513F63-3A6F-4981-AF34-6B92F2828581 v1
The phase selection logic determines the loop:
• for the underimpedance starting measurement when an ground fault has been detected• to be measured in the first period (max. 20 ms) after starting• to be measured during the time the function is in the picked-up state when a ground fault
has been detected on an ungrounded system or system with Petersen coils (phaseselection ≠ solidly grounded)
In a solidly grounded system (parameter PhaseSelMode set to solid gr.), the loop to bemeasured is determined according to the following table:
Table 48: Solidly grounded system- loop to be measured
Type of fault Starters Loop measured
Phase-to-ground fault L1, E L1E
Phase-to-ground fault L2, E L2E
Phase-to-ground fault L3, E L3E
Phase-to-phase fault L1, L2 L1L2
Phase-to-phase fault L2, L3 L2L3
Phase-to-phase fault L3, L1 L3R
Phase-to-phase-to-ground fault L1, L2, E L1L2
Phase-to-phase-to-ground fault L2, L3, E L2L3
Phase-to-phase-to-ground fault L3, L1, E L3L1
Three-phase fault L1, L2, L3 L3L1 (L1L2) (L2L3)
In a solidly grounded system, both phases involved in a phase-to-phase-to-ground fault haveto trip, which is not the case in ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils. Thephase-to-phase loops are measured.
In ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils (parameter PhaseSelMode set to cyclic/acyclic phase selection), the loop to be measured is determined according to the followingtable:
Table 49: Ungrounded system or Peterson coil - loop to be measured
Type of fault Starters Loop measured
Phase-to-phase fault L1, L2 L1L2
Phase-to-phase fault L2, L3 L2L3
Phase-to-phase fault L3, L1 L3L1
Three-phase fault L1, L2, L3 L3L1 (L1L2) (L2L3)
Cross-country fault *) L1, L2, E according to phaseselection logic
Cross-country fault *) L2, L3, E
Cross-country fault *) L3, L1, E
*) two ground faults at different locations
In ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils, it is usual for just one of the twoground faults of a cross-country fault to be tripped, so that as much of the system remains inoperation as possible.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 57Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
This is achieved by arranging for all the distance relays on the system to measure the sameground fault loop and this is the purpose of the phase selection function.
The logic of the phase selection function provides a choice of the following sequences:
Table 50: Phase selection function
Starters Fault loop measure in relation to “PhaseSelMode”L1L3L2L1 L3L1L2L3 L1L3L2 L1L2L3 L3L2L1 L3L1L2 L2L1L3 L2L3L1cycl. cycl. acycl. acycl. acycl. acycl. acycl. acycl.
L1, L2, E L2E L1E L1E L1E L2E L1E L2E L2E
L2, L3, E L3E L2E L3E L2E L3E L3E L2E L2E
L3, L1, E L1E L3E L1E L1E L3E L3E L1E L3E
L1L3L2L1 cyclic (L1 before L3, L3 before L2, L2 before L1) means, for example, that for a cross-country fault L3-L1-E, L1 phase (the L1-E loop) is measured rather than L3 phase, for a cross-country fault L2-L3-E, L3 phase (the L3-E loop) rather than L2 phase and for a cross-countryfault L1-L2-E, L2 phase (the L2-E loop) rather than L1 phase.
L1L3L2 acyclic (L1 before L3 before L2) means, for example, that for a cross-country fault L3-L1-E, L1 phase (the L1-E loop) is measured rather than L3 phase, for a cross-country fault L2-L3-E,L3 phase (the L3-E loop) rather than L2 phase and for a cross-country fault L1-L2-E, L1 phase(the L1-E loop) rather than L2 phase.
5.1.7.2 Distance measurement
Measurement procedureGUID-4758E276-EF78-407E-A4FB-4DBDB27D8DF6 v1
The distance measurement of a fault is enabled after one of the two starting functions,overcurrent or underimpedance, has picked up twice.
Initially the fault loop determined by the phase selection function is measured. This is calledprocessing period I and lasts until a trip signal is generated in the first zone or a maximum ofone period of the power system frequency.
At the latest after one period of the power system frequency, all six impedance loops aremeasured. This is called processing period II, during which the three phase-to-ground loopsand the three phase-to-phase loops are measured alternately.
Comparison of the results of the six measurements eliminates those impedance loops, whichare not involved in the fault (selectivity conditions).
The timer started by the starting units controls the comparison of the measured impedanceswith the polygon characteristic.
Measurement during processing period IGUID-E268B4D1-355B-4054-93C6-A238ED29EDCA v1
Processing period I lasts from the instant a starter picks up until the first tripping signal isgenerated, but is restricted to a maximum of one period of the power system frequency. Theinput signals are the phase currents IL1, IL2, IL3, the residual current IE (3I0), the residual currentof any parallel circuit IEm (3I0m), the neutral current IEm of any parallel circuit of a double-circuitline (3I0m) and the three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2 and UL3. All are sampled, analogueand digitally filtered and broken down into their component vectors.
If the overcurrent starters are in operation and have picked up, the phase selection function isperformed and the loop to be measured determined. Should this not be the case, the loopdetermined by the underimpedance starters is measured.
The impedance of a phase-to-ground loop, for example, L1-E is calculated using the equation:
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
58 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
1
1 0 0
LR
L E m Em
UZ
I k I k I
(compensated)
where,
• k0: zero-sequence compensation factor for Z0
0 1/ 3k Z
• k0m: zero-sequence compensation factor for the mutual impedance Z0m of double-circuitline
0 0 13m mk Z Z
The mutual zero-sequence impedance of a double-circuit line (k0m × IEm) is only compensatedfor the first, second and overreaching zones, and in the latter two cases, only if their directionof measurement is the same as that of the first zone. In this respect, a reverse measuring zoneis treated in the same manner as an overreaching zone.
The mutual zero-sequence impedance (k0m × IEm) is not compensated, should IEm exceed 1.25 ×IE or the direction of IEm not be the same as that of IE. This prevents a healthy parallel circuitfrom being adversely influenced by a fault relatively close to the relay location of the faultedcircuit.
Assuming a fault between L1 and L2, the impedance of the phase-to-phase loop is calculatedusing the equation:
1 21 2
1 2
L LL L
L L
U UZ
I I
It is determined almost simultaneously, whether the impedance measured lies within thecharacteristic and whether it is in the direction of the first zone and overreaching zone, or inthe direction of the reverse measuring zone. The corresponding tripping and other signals areprocessed by the system logic. Tripping of the circuit-breaker, however, only takes place aftera measuring unit has operated twice.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 59Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
I , I , I , IL1 L2 L3 E
U , U , U , UL1 L2 L3 E
START
NTrip
N
Y
Z calculation
(ph-0 compensated)
Overcurrent
Stoping
Y
END
Signalling,fault location,
Z(loop)
the timers
Nt > 1 periode
Loop =
phase selection
starter
Y
Change to
processing
periode II
Overcurrent
starter
Change to
processing
periode II
Z , Z , (Z ),Start 1-4 OR
Z , directionBack
18000014-IEC19000416-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000416 V1 EN-US
Figure 15: Processing period I
Measurement during processing period IIGUID-170FC07B-AEC8-4224-9871-EB915AC3D2FD v1
Processing period II commences after the first tripping signal or at the latest one period of thesystem frequency after a starter picks up. The variables measured are the same as thosealready processed during processing period I.
Only in the case of a cross-country fault in an ungrounded system or system with Petersencoils is measurement restricted during processing period II to just the impedance loopdetermined by the phase selection logic, otherwise all the phase-to-ground and phase-to-
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
60 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
phase impedance loops are continuously processed in sequence, providing the enabling andground fault criteria are fulfilled.
The equations used to calculate the loop impedances are the same as those used in Section .
It is then determined whether the impedance measured lies within the characteristic andwhether it is in the direction of the zone being measured. The overreaching zone and reversemeasuring zone are evaluated as part of the measurement of the first zone. The correspondingtripping and other signals are processed by the system logic. Tripping of the circuit-breaker,however, only takes place after a measuring unit has operated twice.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 61Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
UL1, UL2, UL3, UE
IL1, IL2, IL3, IE
START
N
N
Y
Y
END
Signals
Stop timers
N Trip
Reset signals
Selectivity conditions
Y
Solidly grounded system AND
(I > starting active)
Calculat six Z (Ph-0 compensated)
Reset conditions
Signals, Fault location,
Z(loop)
Istart, UZ starters
Select phases
Ph-E N
Y
Calculat three Z Ph-Ph
Calculate Z Ph-0
ZStart, Z1-4, (ZOR), ZBack, direction
18000015-IEC19000417-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000417 V1 EN-US
Figure 16: Processing period II
Directional decisionGUID-10744C55-5A70-473E-84CF-B1D445573981 v1
Before deciding the direction of a fault, the fault voltage (used as reference voltage) is checkedto determine whether it is higher than the setting of the parameter UKmin (minimum fault
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
62 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
voltage). Providing this is the case, the phase-angle of the impedance, that is, between faultcurrent and voltage, is determined:
arg argU
ZI
argZ = arg U - arg I
where,
• arg: argument of the complex number (angle)• U: fault voltage
U = UL1 (phase-to-ground loop L1-E)U = UL1 − UL2 (phase-to-phase loop L1-L2)
• I: fault currentI = IL1 (phase-to-ground loop L1-E)I = IL1 − IL2 (phase-to-phase loop L1-L2)
arg Z must lie within the following limits for the fault to be designated a forwards fault:
-27° < arg Z < +117°
Arg Z must lie within the following limits for the fault to be designated a reverse fault:
+153° < arg Z < -63°
Z is the impedance measured by the protection, which corresponds to the line impedance ZL.By using the fault voltage as reference voltage for determining direction, the measurement isindependent of source impedance.
If the fault voltage is less than the setting of the parameter
Umin(minimum fault voltage), the impedance is determined from the fault current and aseparate reference voltage:
arg arg arg argrefref ref
UZ U I
I
where,
• arg: angle (argument) of the complex number• Uref: reference voltage
Uref = (UL2 – UL3) ⋅ ∠27° (phase-to-ground loop L1-E)Uref = (UL1 - UL3) + 1/8 ⋅ (UL1mem – UL3mem) (phase-to-phase loop L1-L2)
• I: fault currentI = IL1 (phase-to-ground loop, for example, L1-E)I = IL1 - IL2 (phase-to-phase loop, for example, L1-L2)
The reference voltage Uref is derived from the phase voltages not involved in the fault. In thecase of a phase-to-phase loop, the reference voltage also includes a proportion of the memoryvoltage Umem. The duration of the memory voltage is limited to between 5 and 15 periods ofthe power system frequency, depending on the discrepancy between the measured frequency
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 63Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
and the rated power system frequency, that is, the memory voltage is used for 15 periods atrated system frequency and for a proportionally reduced number of periods as the frequencydeviates from rated power system frequency.
As long as the reference voltage Uref is greater than 0.5% of the rated voltage, it is used todetermine fault direction.
In this case, a forwards fault satisfies the condition:
-90° < arg Zref < +90°
A reverse fault satisfies the condition:
+90° < arg Zref < -90°
Zref is the impedance measured by the protection, which contains a component of the sourceimpedance ZS in addition to the line impedance ZL. The operating characteristic has to bemathematically transformed in order to make the influence of the source impedance visible. Ifthe reference voltage is less than 0.5% of the rated voltage, direction is not taken into accountfor the phase-to-ground loop and tripping is blocked. In the case of the phase-to-phase loops,tripping is either enabled or blocked, depending on the setting of the parameter MemDirMode.
5.1.7.3 VT supervisionGUID-66C20810-64C5-419C-9A32-29BBE2A3DA00 v1
The purpose of the VT supervision function is to monitor the VT leads with respect toasymmetrical short-circuits and open-circuits. An MCB can be included for three-phase VTshort-circuits and arranged to block the protection via a separate optocoupler input.
The input variables monitored by the VT supervision function are the three voltages UL1, UL2,and UL3 and the three currents IL1, IL2, IL3. The zero-sequence (U0, I0) and negative-sequence(U2, I2) components are calculated for both the three-phase voltage and three-phase currentsystems:
3U0 = UL1 + UL2 + UL3
3U2 = UL1 + UL2 × a2 + UL3 × a3
0.5 1/1202
a j
3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3
3I2 = IL1 + IL2 × a2 + IL3 × a
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
64 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
18000016-IEC19000418-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000418 V1 EN-US
Figure 17: VT supervision
The measurement has to be performed using the negative-sequence component, wheneverthere is no source of residual current behind the relay, that is, no grounded transformerneutrals. The parameter VTSupMode (operating mode) must be set accordingly.
The zero and/or negative-sequence components of currents and voltages are compared withthe settings of the parameters:
• U0min VTSup [U0_VTSUP]• I0min VTSup [I0_VTSUP]• U2min VTSup [U2_VTSUP]• I2min VTSup [I2_VTSUP]• the associated binary signals U0, U2, I0 and I2 are then set to logical 1 or left at logical 0.
The signals U0 and U2 are delayed by 5 ms as a precaution against incorrect blocking as aresult of discrepancies between the operating times of the three circuit-breaker poles.
Depending on the operating mode selected, one of the following four conditions is monitored:
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 65Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
• U0 not I0 residual voltage, but no residual current• U2 not I2 negative seq. voltage, but no neg. seq. current• (U0 not I0) + (U2 not I2) condition 1 or 2• U2 . not (I0 + I2) negative sequence voltage, but neither residual current nor negative
sequence current.
Blocking by the VT supervision function is delayed for 12 s following manual closing of thecircuit-breaker, an external blocking signal (MCB via an optocoupler input), a transfer trippingsignal from the opposite station or the generation of a local tripping signal.
Should U0 (or U2) and I0 (or I2) pick-up during this delay, operation of the VT supervisionfunction remains blocked until U0 (or U2) resets. This measure prevents unwanted blockingduring single-phase autoreclosure.
The signal generated by the VT supervision function VTSupMode instantly blocks the distanceprotection function. Resetting the parameter VTSupMode [VTSUP_BLKDEL] enables thedistance function to be blocked after delay of 12 s.
From 12 s after the VT supervision circuit has picked up, resetting of blocking is delayed by 1 s.Standard MCB’s can therefore be used, providing their main contacts do not close before theirauxiliary contacts.
Blocking by the VT supervision circuit resets the instant a fault with zero and negativesequence components occurs.
The parameter VTSupDebDel [VTSUP_DEBDEL] (deblocking) provides facility for setting the 1 sreset delay permanently regardless of current.
The blocking signal issued by the VT supervision function does not influence the backupovercurrent function.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
66 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5 145 14
5 145 14
OROR
OROR
1200012000
1200012000
U2_VTSUP
U0_VTSUP
D_RST
MANCL_DIST
HFREC
EXTBLK_DIST
I2_VTSUP
I0_VTSUP
OROROROR
ANDANDAND
ANDANDANDOROR
ANDANDAND
ANDANDAND
OROR
ANDANDAND
OROROROR
ANDANDANDOROR
VTSUP_BLKDEL
VTSUP DEBDEL
12000 100012000 1000
VTFAIL
VTFAIL_DLY
VTFAIL_IU0
VTFAIL_IU2
18000017-IEC19000419-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000419 V1 EN-US
Figure 18: VTSUP
Table 51: Signals VT supervision (see above diagram)
Signal In Out Source Drain
U2_VTSUP X U2 > U2 VT Sup
U0_VTSUP X U0 > U0 VT Sup
D_L1L2L3 X Binary output: Trip L1L2L3
MANCL_DIST X Binary input: Manual Close
HFREC X Binary input: Com Rec
EXTBLK_DIST X Binary input: Ext Blk Dist
I2_VTSUP X I2 > I2 VT Sup
I0_VTSUP X I0 > I0 VT Sup
VTSUP_BLKDEL X Input parameter: Sup Blk Del On = 1;Off = 0
VTSUP_DEBDEL X Input parameter: Sup Deb Del On =1; Off = 0
VTFAIL_IU2 X Internal logic signal
VTFAIL_IU0 X Internal logic signal
VTFAIL_DLY X Binary output: VT Sup
VTFAIL X Binary output: VT Sup Del
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 67Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.1.7.4 Backup overcurrent function (O/C Backup)GUID-4A4F2D83-D04E-4142-BC6C-D7B9D20D0FD0 v1
The distance protection function includes a definite time overcurrent unit as backupprotection. A starting signal Start O/C is set to logical 1, when one or more of the currents IL1,IL2, and IL3 exceed the setting of I O/C. After the time O/C Delay, the tripping signal Trip O/Cto the system logic is set to logical 1.
Blocking signals generated by the distance, underimpedance starting, power swing blockingor VT supervision functions do not influence the backup overcurrent function.
The overcurrent function is independent of the distance protection starters and, not having toperform phase selection, can have a more sensitive setting.
5.1.7.5 System logic
Structure of the system logicGUID-1AF2E4BA-F6B1-4611-A4DA-ED64F2D7C3A4 v1
The system logic processes the binary input signals from external plant (optocoupler inputs)and all the binary signals of the distance protection function.
18000018-IEC19000420-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000420 V1 EN-US
Figure 19: System logic in the distance protection function
The system logic outputs are binary signals for controlling a disturbance recorder, LED signalsand auxiliary tripping and signaling relays.
Enabling and disabling logic (SUPBL)GUID-8513CE77-ACA6-47B3-82D3-9AFE624C370B v1
The logic of the VT supervision function (VTSUP segment) has already been described in therelevant Section. The external blocking signals for distance protection [EXTBL_DIST] (opto-
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
68 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
coupler inputs), the power swing blocking [PS_BLOCK] and the VT supervision [VT_BLOCK]functions received by the SUPBL segment block all the distance protection functions [DISTBL]with the exception of the backup overcurrent function.
OR
EXTBLK_DIST100
PSBBLOCK
VTFAIL
DISTBL
18000019-IEC19000421-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000421 V1 EN-US
Figure 20: SUPBL segment
Table 52: Signals VT SUPBL
Signal In Out Source Drain
EXTBLK_DIST X Binary input: Ext Blk Dist
PSBBLOCK X Binary output: Ext Blk PSB
VTFAIL X Binary output: VT Sup Delay
DISTBL X Binary output: Dist Block
See Figure 18.
Switch-onto-fault logic (SOTF)GUID-73975CBF-96D6-4264-A0C1-21ED47FF37DD v1
When a circuit-breaker is closed onto and existing three-phase fault anywhere in the powersystem, instantaneous three-phase tripping takes place.
The fault detectors in this case are the non-directional starters (overcurrent orunderimpedance units) or optionally the over-reaching zone, but this is only used in thefollowing special cases:
• Power transformer with high inrush currents at the remote end of the line. In such cases,fault detection involving the distance measuring units is safer.
• Close faults with complete voltage collapse may possibly not otherwise be detected, inwhich case the parameter MemDirMode has to be set to Trip.
The switch-onto-fault logic can be activated and the switch-onto-fault signal [SOTF] set tological 1 in one of three ways:
1. by an auxiliary contact on the CB control switch when closing the CB (optocoupler inputManual close [MANCL_DIST])
2. by an auxiliary contact on the CB when opening the CB (optocoupler input Dead line[DEADLINE])
3. by prolonged undervoltage (U weak) on all three phases and no current enable whichcorresponds to a dead line [UWEAK_L1, L2, L3]
Alternative 2) is used, if the VTs are connected to the busbars and alternative 1) is not possible.The criteria of alternatives 2) and 3) are only effective after either 200 ms or 10 s [SOTF_10S](setting), depending on whether the switch-onto-fault logic is required to operate after
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 69Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
autoreclosure (200 ms) or not (10 s). For dead times longer than 10 s (autoreclosure function)there is the possibility of using the blocking input Ext Blk SOTF. This is a binary input which isinterlocked by [P_SOTF_INIT] via an AND gate.
Combining undervoltage and a missing current enable signal [CREL_L1, L2, L3] as in alternative3) prevents mal-operation of the logic after 200 ms, respectively 10 s, in cases of system faultswith low fault current contribution detected in the higher distance zones.
Resetting of the signal SOTF [START_SOTF] is delayed by 1 s, that is, every distance protectionstart within a time of 1 s after one of the three switch-onto-fault criteria was fulfilled gives riseto three-phase tripping [SOTF] of the circuit-breaker.
Uweak_L1
Uweak_L2
Uweak_L3T
AND
CREL_L1
CREL_L2
OR DeadLine
AND SOTF_10S
AND
10000
200
OR
1000
AND
MANCL_DIST
SOTF_INI
START_SOTF
SOTF
CREL_L3
18000020-IEC19000422-1-en.vsdx
18000020-IEC19000425-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000422 V1 EN-US
Figure 21: SOFT segment
Table 53: Signals SOFT (see above diagram)
Signal In Out Source Drain
Uweak_L1 X Starter: UL1 < Umin
Uweak_L2 X Starter: UL2 < Umin
Uweak_L3 X Starter: UL3 < Umin
CREL_L1 X Starter: IL1 > Imin (current release)
CREL_L2 X Starter: IL2 > Imin (current release)
CREL_L3 X Starter: IL3 > Imin (current release)
DeadLine X Binary input: DeadLine
SOTF_10S X Setting: SOFT 10sec(On=1 / Off=0)
MANCL_DIST X Binary input: Manual Close
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
70 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Signal In Out Source Drain
SOTF_INI X Always = 0,when SOFT = Offwhen SOFT = Non-directionalSOTF_INI = (Starter! = 0)when SOFT = Forwards ORSOTF_INI = (Starter! = 0) &(fault in overreach zone)
START_SOTF X Binary signal: SOFTpicked up
SOTF X Binary signal: SOFTstarting signal
Short-zone logic (STUB)GUID-9988E657-D310-4C53-B57B-4707C9A89623 v1
In 1½ breaker schemes, the short zone between the two circuit-breakers and the line isolatorcan be protected by the backup overcurrent function by permitting its instantaneous pick-upsignal [TRIP_OC_L1L2L3] to trip the circuit-breakers [TRIP_STUB] after 25 ms whenever the lineisolator is open (signal applied to the optocoupler input Isolator open).
This arrangement is only necessary, if the VTs are installed on the line side of the isolator andthe CTs are in the bars between the circuit-breakers.
AND
25
ISOL_OPEN
TRIP_OC_L1L2L3 TRIP_STUB
18000021-IEC19000423-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000423 V1 EN-US
Figure 22: STUB segment
Table 54: Signals VT STUB (see above diagram)
Signal In Out Source Drain
ISOL_OPEN X Binary input: Isolator open
TRIP_OC_L1L2L3 X Binary signal: Trip O/C
TRIP_STUB X Binary signal: Trip Stub
Zone extension logic (ZE)GUID-732C90E0-C051-498E-8E01-B8BAEF2D48A1 v1
This logic enables a signal from another function or an external signal to switch the reach ofthe first distance zone from the underreaching to overreaching [BIT_TRIP_ZE].
Such a signal can originate, for example, from the internal auto-reclosure function (binaryinput ZExtensionAR [AR_ZE]) or from an optocoupler input (binary input ZExtension [ZE_FOR_DIST]).
The internal autoreclosure function issues an overreach signal [AR_ZE] when all theautoreclosure conditions are fulfilled.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 71Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
OR
AND RSFF
S
R Q
AR_ZE
START_ L1L2L3 BIT_TRIP_ZE
ZE_FOR_DIST
18000022-IEC19000424-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000424 V1 EN-US
Figure 23: ZE segment
Table 55: Signals ZE (see above diagram)
Signal In Out Source Drain
ZE_FR_DIST X Binary input: ZExtension
AR_ZE X Binary input: ZExtensionAR
START_L1L2L3 X Binary signal: Start L1+L2+L3
BIT_TRIP_ZE X Internal signal to trip logic(TRIP3)
Communication channel failure (UNBLOCK)GUID-EB4943D5-5BA6-473A-BCB0-FB8B294A3B96 v1
This logic is only used in conjunction with a permissive underreaching transfer trippingscheme (PUTT OR2) or a permissive overreaching transfer tripping scheme (POTT).
The logic causes the communication channel failure signal from the communicationequipment (optocoupler input Com Fail) to be interpreted as a receive signal for 100 ms. Thisenables tripping [BIT_UNBL] to take place in PUTT OR2 or POTT schemes in cases where thePLC receive signal is attenuated by the primary system fault on the line.
AND 20
20AND
P UNBLOCK
HFREC
HFFAIL
BIT_UNBL
180000023-IEC19000425-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000425 V1 EN-US
Figure 24: UNBLOCK segment
Table 56: Signals UNBLOCK (see above diagram)
Signal In Out Source Drain
P_UNBLOCK X Setting: UnblockOn = 1; Off = 0
HFREC X Binary input: Com Rec
HFFAIL X Binary signal: Com Fail
BIT_UNBL X Internal signal to the POTTor PUTT logic.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
72 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (PUTT)GUID-666A852F-90EE-4C7D-BF10-B16BFE5DDD69 v1
The criteria for tripping and transmission of a transfer trip signal by the distance protectionfunction in a PUTT scheme are given in the tabular overview below.
t = Delay (1) Trip Send Trip (PUTT NONDIR) Trip (PUTT FWD) Trip (PUTT OR2) Send Trip Send Trip Send Trip Send
t = Com Rec :
t = Delay (Def) :
t = Delay (3) :
t = Delay (2) :
= 0 sec : = Meas Main = Meas Main = Com Rec * (Start L1+L2+L3 + Weak) = Com Rec * Meas Fward = (Com Rec + Unblock) * Meas Oreach = Meas Main = Meas Main = Meas Main = Meas Main = "0" = Start L1+L2+L3 (dir/nondir) = "0"
IEC19000426 V1 EN-US
PUTT transmit logic (PUTT_SEND)GUID-DBE31BF6-F8DB-4CE9-90F5-A256D838FC8D v1
The logic (PUTT_SEND) transfers its output signals to a common transmit logic for PUTT,POTT and BLOCK OR schemes.
AND
PUTT ON
PUTTSEND
PUTT NONDIR
PUTT FWD
PUTT OROR
DELAY3
MEAS MAIN
START LIL2L3
18000024-IEC19000427-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000427 V1 EN-US
Figure 25: PUTT_SEND segment
Table 57: Signals PUTT_SEND (see above diagram)
Signal In Out Source Drain
PUTT_NONDIRPUTT_FWDPUTT_OR
X Setting: Com ModePUTT non-directional:PUTT_NONDIR = 1PUTT Forwards: PUTT_FWD = 1PUTT OR2: PUTT_BWD = 1
DELAY3 X Binary output: Delay 3
MEAS_MAIN X Binary output: Meas Main
START_L1L2L3 X Binary output: Start L1+L2+L3
PUTT_ON X Internal signal to thedistance functiontransmit logic(SENDLOGIC)
PUTT_SEND X Internal signal to thedistance functiontransmit logic
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 73Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
The transmission criteria are fulfilled when the local measuring unit trips, thestarters have picked up and the third time step has not started.
PUTT receive logic (PUTT_REC)GUID-DF78E9B4-5AED-4F54-BDB4-282C1DCFC704 v1
The receive logic (PUTT_REC) transfers its output signals to the tripping logic. Account istaken of a weak infeed (Weak) [UWEAK_L1, L2, L3] or a short enable signal in the event offailure of the communication channel (Unblock) [BIT_UNBL].
Provision is made for applying the tripping criterion to the entire underimpedance startingcharacteristic (PUTT non-directional) [PUTT_NONDIR], starting in forwards direction (PUTTForwards) [PUTT_FWD] or the overreaching of 2nd zone (PUTT OR2) [PUTT_OR2].
AND
AND
OR
AND
OR
OR
AND
AND AND
OR
OR
OR
PUTT_NONDIR
START_L1L2L3
PUTT_OR
MEAS_OR2
PUTT_FWD
UZ_FWD
DELAY2
M_OWN
BIT_UNBL
HFREC
P_WEAK
100
100
AND
AND
TRIP_PUTT
UWEAK_PUTT
UWEAK_L1_PUTT
UWEAK_L2_PUTT
UWEAK_L3_PUTT
UWEAK_L1
UWEAK_L2
UWEAK_L3
5000
18000025-IEC19000428-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000428 V1 EN-US
Figure 26: PUTT_REC segment
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
74 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Table 58: Signals PUTT_REC (see above diagram)
Signal In Out Source Drain
PUTT_NONDIRPUTT_FWDPUTT_OR
X Setting: Com ModePUTT non-directional:PUTT_NONDIR = 1PUTT Forwards:PUTT_FWD = 1PUTT OR2:PUTT_BWD = 1
DELAY2 X Binary output: Delay 2
M_OWN X Internal logic signal (TRIP2)
START_L1L2L3 X Binary output: Start L1+L2+L3
UZ_FWD X Binary output: Meas Fward
MEAS OR2 X Binary output: Meas Oreach
BIT_UNBL X Internal logic signal (UNBLOCK)
HFREC X Binary input: Com Rec
P_WEAK X Setting: WeakOn = 1; Off = 0
UWEAK_L1 X UL1 < Umin
UWEAK_L2 X UL2 < Umin
UWEAK_L3 X UL3 < Umin
TRIP_PUTT X Internal signal totripping logic (TRIP2),where it is comparedwith all the trippingconditions to generatethe binary signals TripL1, Trip L2 etc.
UWEAK_PUTT X Internal signal totripping logic (TRIP1)
UWEAK_L1_PUTT X Internal signal totripping logic (TRIP1)
UWEAK_L2_PUTT X Internal signal totripping logic (TRIP1)
UWEAK_L3_PUTT X Internal signal totripping logic (TRIP1)
Permissive overreaching transfer tripping (POTT)GUID-0BCB973B-50BB-4274-B7A5-6E26D6CDC88D v1
The POTT logic is divided into a receive logic (POTT_REC) and a transmit logic (POTT_SEND).
The receive logic (POTT_REC) transfers its output signals to the tripping logic. Account istaken of any weak infeed (Weak) [UWEAK_L1, L2, L3], a short enable signal in the event offailure of the communication channel (Unblock) [BIT_UNBL] or transient blocking (Transbl)[BIT_TBE] signal.
The logic (POTT_SEND) transfers its output signals to a com-mon transmit logic for PUTT,POTT and BLOCK OR schemes, while taking account of any echo signal received in the event ofa weak infeed. The criteria for tripping [TRIP_POTT] and transmission [SEND_POTT] of atransfer trip signal by the distance protection function in a POTT scheme are given in thetabular overview below:
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 75Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
t = Delay (1) Trip
Send Trip Trip Weak Send Send Echo Trip Send Trip Send Trip Send
t = Com Rec :
t = Delay (Def) :
t = Delay (3) :
t = Delay (2) :
= 0 sec : = Meas Main = Meas Oreach * notTransbl = (Com Rec + Unblock) * Meas Oreach * notTransbl = Com Rec * Weak * notMeas Bward * notMeas Oreach = Meas Oreach * notTransbl = Com Rec * notMeas Bward = Meas Main = "0" = Meas Main = "0" = Start L1+L2+L3 (dir/nondir) = "0"
IEC19000429 V1 EN-US
POTT transmit logic (POTT_SEND)GUID-994B7BE2-D432-4EA1-9F19-9D37D6B8F750 v1
AND
AND
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
OR
P_POTTPOTT_ON
MEAS_OR2
BIT_TBE
DELAY2
P_ECHO
100
EXTBLK_HF
HFREC
150
POTT_SEND
MEAS_BWD
M_OWN
18000026-IEC19000430-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000430 V1 EN-US
Figure 27: POTT_SEND segment
Table 59: Signals POTT_SEND
Signal In Out Source Drain
P_POTT X Setting: Com ModePOTTP_POTT= 1
MEAS_OR2 X Binary output: Meas Oreach
BIT_TBE X Internal logic signal TRANSBL
DELAY2 X Binary output: Delay 2
P_ECHO X Setting: EchoOn = 1; Off = 0
MEAS_BWD X Binary output: Meas Bward
M_OWN X Internal logic signal (TRIP2)
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
76 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Signal In Out Source Drain
EXTBLK_HF X Binary input: Com Rec
HFREC X Binary input: Ext Block HF
POTT_ON X Internal signal to thedistance functiontransmit logic
POTT_SEND X Internal signal to thedistance functiontransmit logic
POTT receive logic (POTT_REC)GUID-3FD38395-336F-41AD-B91E-B5B03E15C4C6 v1
OR
AND
OR
AND
OR
AND
OR
OR
200
20
200
5000
AND
AND
MEAS_OR2
BIT_UNBL
HFREC
BIT_TBE
DELAY2
M_OWN
EXTBLK_HF
MEAS_BWD
UWEAK_L1
UWEAK_L2
UWEAK_L3
P_WEAK
TBA_POTT
TRIP_POTT
UWEAK_POTT
UWEAK_L2_POTT
UWEAK_L3_POTT
18000027-IEC19000431-1-en.vsdx
UWEAK_L1_POTT
IEC19000431 V1 EN-US
Figure 28: POTT_REC segment
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 77Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Table 60: Signals POTT_REC
Signal In Out Source Drain
MEAS OR2 X Binary output: Meas Oreach
BIT_UNBL X Internal logic signal (UNBLOCK)
HFREC X Binary input: Com Rec
BIT_TBE X Internal logic signal TRANSBL
DELAY2 X Binary output: Delay 2
M_OWN X Internal logic signal (TRIP2)
EXTBLK_HF X Binary input: Com Rec
MEAS_BWD X Binary output: Meas Bward
UWEAK_L1 X UL1 < Umin
UWEAK_L2 X UL2 < Umin
UWEAK_L3 X UL3 < Umin
P_WEAK X Setting: WeakOn = 1; Off = 0
TBA_POTT X Internal logic signalTRANSBL
TRIP_POTT X Internal signal to trippinglogic (TRIP2), where it iscompared with all thetripping conditions togenerate the binarysignals Trip L1, Trip L2etc.
UWEAK_POTT X Internal signal to trippinglogic (TRIP1)
UWEAK_L1_POTT X Internal signal to trippinglogic (TRIP1)
UWEAK_L2_POTT X Internal signal to trippinglogic (TRIP1)
UWEAK_L3_POTT X Internal signal to trippinglogic (TRIP1)
Overreaching blocking scheme (BLOCK OR)GUID-26BC59BE-2C94-4675-A3EA-E6724D37FEAC v1
The BLOCK OR logic is divided into a receive logic (BLOC_REC) and a transmit logic(BLOC_SEND).
The output signals from the receive logic (BLOC_REC) are transferred to the tripping logic,while taking account of any transient blocking due to reversal of energy direction (TRANSBL).The output signals from the transmit logic are transferred to the common transmit logic forPUTT, POTT and BLOCK OR schemes. The tripping and transmit criteria can be seen from thetabular overview below.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
78 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
t = Delay (1) Trip Send Trip Send
Trip Send Trip Send
Trip Send
t = t1Block :
t = Delay (Def) :
t = Delay (3) :
t = Delay (2)
:
= 0 sec :
= Meas Main = Meas Bward = Meas Oreach * notComRec * notTransbl = Meas Bward + Transbl
= Meas Main = "0" = Meas Main = "0"
= Start L1+L2+L3 (dir/nondir) = "0"
IEC19000432 V1 EN-US
Block transmit logic BLOC_SENDGUID-44E3AA1C-BB3C-45A5-B3BD-7B7F6043E14B v1
AND
AND
AND
100
BLOCK ON
BLOCK
P BLOCK
SEND
HFFAIL
DELAY2
MEAS OR2
MEAS BWD
BIT TBE
18000028-IEC19000433-1-en.vsdx
OR
IEC19000433 V1 EN-US
Figure 29: BLOC_SEND segment
Table 61: Signals BLOC_SEND
Signal In Out Source Drain
P_BLOCK X Setting: Com ModeBLOCK OR P_BLOCK= 1
HFFAIL X Binary input Com Fail
BIT_TBE X Internal logic signalTRANSBL
MEAS OR2 X Binary output: Meas Oreach
DELAY2 X Binary output: Delay 2
MEAS_BWD X Binary output: Meas Bward
EXTBLK_HF X Binary input: Com Rec
BLOCK_ON X Internal signal to thedistance function transmitlogic
BLOCK_SEND X Internal signal to thedistance function transmitlogic
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 79Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
BLOCK receive logic (BLOC_REC)GUID-FF5B11F4-7F28-49B4-BBC1-C4C142D6D30F v1
AND
OR
AND
AND
T1 TRIP_BLOCK
TBA_BLOCK
P_BLOCK
HFFAIL
MEAS_OR2
P_T1_BLOCK
HFREC
DELAY2
M_OWN
BIT_TBE
18000029-IEC19000434-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000434 V1 EN-US
Figure 30: BLOC_REC segment
Table 62: Signals BLOC_REC
Signal In Out Source Drain
P_BLOCK X Setting: Com ModeBLOCK OR. P_BLOCK= 1
HFFAIL X Binary input Com Fail
BIT_TBE X Internal logic signal TRANSBL
MEAS OR2 X Binary output: Meas Oreach
DELAY2 X Binary output: Delay 2
MEAS_BWD X Binary output: Meas Bward
EXTBLK_HF X Binary input: Com Rec
P_T1_BLOCK Setting: t1Block
M_OWN X Internal logic signal (TRIP2)
HFREC X Binary input: Com Rec
TRIP_BLOCK X Internal signal to trippinglogic (TRIP2), where it iscompared with all thetripping conditions togenerate the binarysignals Trip L1, Trip L2 etc.
TBA_BLOCK X Internal logic signalTRANSBL
Reversal of power direction (TRANSBL)GUID-967B11E2-07FE-4A97-BAE5-7A1B47E5868E v1
This logic is only used in conjunction with a permissive over-reaching transfer tripping scheme(POTT) or an overreaching blocking scheme (BLOCK OR) on double-circuit lines with in-feedsfrom both ends and a high mutual zero-sequence impedance (both circuits on the samepylons). A blocking scheme does not require this logic, providing the waiting time is setsufficiently long.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
80 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
The logic solves the following problem (see Figure 31)
t = 0 s :
t = sign.rec.:
t = CB open :
Relays A1, B1 and B2 detect the fault in the OR zone and send a signal to the Remote end. Relay A2 detects a backward fault.
A1
A2 B2
B1
A1
A2 B2
B1
Relays A1, B1 and A2 receive a signal from the Remote end.
A1
A2 B2
B1 CB A1 opens before CB B1 opens. Relay A2 detects the fault in the OR zone, but still receives a signal from the remote end, for example, it trips and opens the “Healthy” line.
18000030-IEC19000435-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000435 V1 EN-US
Figure 31: Reversal of power direction
The operation of the logic is as follows (POTT solution):
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 81Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
OROR
OROR ANDANDAND
T
1
T
1
TBA_BLOCK
TBA_POTT
MEAS_BWDBIT_TBE
100T2 100T2
OROR
OROR ANDANDAND
T
1
T
1
TBA_BLOCK
TBA_POTT
MEAS_BWDBIT_TBE
100T2 100T2
OROR
OROR ANDANDAND
T
1
T
1
TBA_BLOCK
TBA_POTT
MEAS_BWDBIT_TBE
100T2 100T2
>= 1
>= 1
&
>= 1
>= 1
&
>= 1
>= 1
&
t = 0 s:
t = signal received
t = CB open:
~ ~
A1
A2
B1
B2
TBA_BLOCK
TBA_POTT T1
MEAS_BWD
T2 100
BIT_TBE
TBA_BLOCK
TBA_POTT T1
MEAS_BWD
T2 100
BIT_TBE
~ ~
A1
A2
B1
B2
~ ~
A1
A2
B1
B2
TBA_BLOCK
TBA_POTT T1
MEAS_BWD
T2 100
BIT_TBE
18000031-IEC19000436-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000436 V1 EN-US
Figure 32: Solutions to combat reversal of power direction
BIT_TBA = (ComRec + Unblock) × MeasOreach
BIT_TBE blocks TRIP_POTT (see POTT receive logic)
The critical relay A2 cannot trip, because the reverse measurement signal [MEAS_BWD] ismaintained for at least T1 (setting t1TransBl) and resets at the latest after T2 (settingt2TransBl). The purpose of T2 is to ensure that blocking is maintained should there beautoreclosure of the faulted circuit.
T1 allows time for the incorrect Com Rec signal to reset. Its setting is thus given by the resettime of relay B2 and the reset time of the communication channel. The receiver signal must notbe prolonged.
Tripping takes place instantaneously, if the tripping condition TBA is still fulfilled after thetime T1.
Tripping always causes the logic to reset, after which it remains inactive for 100 ms. Thefaulted circuit will therefore be immediately tripped, for example, in the case of anunsuccessful autoreclosure attempt.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
82 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Transmit logicGUID-0CFA8B44-2841-4ADF-AB6D-891A6E04C55B v1
The task of the transmit logic is to boost (Com Boost) the PLC transmitter and transmit asignal (signaling relay output Com Send) [HFSEND] to the opposite end of the line (signalingrelay output Com Boost) [HFBOOST].
General rules are:
• The underreaching zone transmits the signal in a permissive underreaching transfertripping scheme (PUTT).
• The overreaching zone transmits the signal in a permissive overreaching transfer trippingscheme (POTT).
• The reverse measuring zone transmits the blocking signal in an overreaching blockingscheme (BLOCK OR).
OR
OR
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
PUTT_ON
POTT_ON
BLOCK_ON
PUTT_SEND
POTT_SEND
BLOCK_SEND
UWEAK_L1
UWEAK_L2
UWEAK_L3
2000
START_L1L2L3
DISTBL
BIT_HF_ON
HF_SEND
HF_BOOST
18000032-IEC19000437-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000437 V1 EN-US
Figure 33: TRANSBL segment
Table 63: Signals TRANSBL
Signal In Out Source Drain
PUTT_ON X PUTT logic
POTT_ON X POTT logic
BLOCK_ON X BLOCK logic
PUTT_SEND X PUTT logic
POTT_SEND X POTT logic
BLOCK_SEND X BLOCK logic
DISTBL X Enabling logic SUPBL
UWEAK_L1 X UL1 < Umin
UWEAK_L2 X UL2 < Umin
UWEAK_L3 X UL3 < Umin
START_L1L2T X Binary output: Start L1+L2+L3
Table continues on next page
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 83Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Signal In Out Source Drain
BIT_HF_ON X
HF_SEND X Binary output: Com Send
HF_BOOST X Binary output: Com Boost
Tripping logicGUID-1DAAFAD3-A23B-49F2-A598-D5C947EE2083 v1
The main purpose of the tripping logic is coordination of single and three-phase tripping ofthe circuit-breaker (heavy-duty tripping relay outputs). It also provides additional starting andtripping signals.
Single or three-phase tripping is initiated when the following conditions are simultaneouslyfulfilled:
• Starter picked up, that is, underimpedance start or overcurrent start or undervoltage start(Weak) [UWEAK_L1, L2, L3] from the POTT or PUTT receive logic.
• Trip by the relays own measuring unit, the back-up overcurrent unit, the short-zone (STUB)logic, the switch-onto-fault (SOFT) logic, the zone extension logic or by the PUTT, POTT orBLOCK OR receive logic.
• No blocking signal is being generated by the enable and blocking logic. (this signal cannotblock tripping by the back-up overcurrent unit or short-zone logic).
Only single-phase tripping will take place when:
• Trip Mode is set to 1 Ph Trip• The starter of just one phase has picked up• None of the conditions for three-phase tripping is fulfilled
Any of the following conditions results in three-phase tripping:
• Trip Mode set to 3 Ph Trip.• The starters of more than one phase have picked up.• The autoreclosure function commands the distance function to trip all three-phases.• Either the back-up overcurrent function or the short-zone logic has tripped.• Operation of the switch-onto-fault logic• A second trip occurs (for example, evolving fault), for example, during the autoreclosure
dead time.• The parameter Trip Mode is set to 3 Ph Trip Del 3 and the zone 3 time has expired
(autoreclosure in the 2nd zone as well).
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
84 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
TRIP 1GUID-92B6141A-DAD1-4FEC-9D8A-B37CF30ECAB3 v1
OROR
OROR
OROR
OROR
OROR
OROR
OROR
PHSEL_L1
UWEAK_L1_PUTT
UWEAK_L1_POTT
START_L1
PHSEL_L2
UWEAK_L2_PUTT
UWEAK_L2_POTT
START_L2
PHSEL_L3
UWEAK_L3_PUTT
UWEAK_L3_POTT
START_L3
OC_L1L2L3
P_L1L2L3
SIG_L3
BIT_L3
SIG_L2
BIT_L2
SIG_L1
BIT_L1
18000033-IEC19000438-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000438 V1 EN-US
Figure 34: TRIP 1 segment
Table 64: Signals TRIP 1
Signal In Out Source Drain
PHSEL_L1 X Phase sel L1
UWEAK_L1_PUTT X PUTT
UWEAK_L1_POTT X POTT
START_L1 X Start L1
PHSEL_L2 X Phase sel L2
UWEAK_L2_PUTT X PUTT
UWEAK_R_POTT X POTT
START_L2 X Start L2
PHSEL_L3 X Phase sel L3
UWEAK_L3_PUTT X PUTT
UWEAK_L3_POTT X POTT
START_L3 X Start L3
OC_L1SL3 X Start O/C Backup
BIT_L1 X TRIP3, TRIP2
SIG_L1 X Binary output Start L1
BIT_L2 X TRIP3, TRIP2
SIG_L2 X Binary output Start L2
BIT_L3 X TRIP3, TRIP2
SIG_L3 X Binary output Start L3
P_L1L2L3 X Binary output Start L1L2L3
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 85Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
TRIP 2GUID-DAA576EF-6B65-4556-825E-14548B9C00D0 v1
AND
BIT_L1
AND
AND
BIT_L2
BIT_L2
BIT_L3
BIT_L3
BIT_L1
AND
P_L1L2L3
DL1L2T
Tim
AND
4
AND
OR
AND
OR
P_T1_TRIP
OC_D
SOTF
TRIP_STUB
TRIP_3PH
AR_1POL_IN
BIT_3P
18000034-IEC19000439-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000439 V1 EN-US
Figure 35: TRIP 2 segment
Table 65: Signals TRIP 2
Signal In Out Source Drain
Signal In Out Source Drain
BIT_L1 X TRIP1
BIT_L2 X TRIP1
BIT_L3 X TRIP1
P_L1L2L3 X TRIP1
DL1L2L3 X Binary output: TRIP L1L2L3
P_T1_TRIP X Setting: t1 Evol Faults
OC_D X Binary output: Trip O/C
SOTF X Binary output: Trip CB
TRIP_STUB X STUB
TRIP_3PH X Setting: Trip Mode
AR_1POL_IN X Binary input: 1 pol AR
BIT_3P X TRIP3
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
86 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
TRIP 3GUID-DBF6475A-745D-4199-823D-7DE3465F44A9 v1
OR
AND
OR
OR
AND
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
RSFF
S
R Q
100
50ms
50ms
50ms
D
DL1
DL2
DL3
SOTF
ZE_FOR_DIST
MEAS_OR2
START_L1L2L3
AR_ZE
TRIP_STUB
OC_D
MEAS_MAIN
TRIP_PUTT
TRIP_POTT
TRIP_BLOCK
HF_OFF
BIT_3P
BIT_L1
BIT_L2
BIT_L3
DISTBL
M_OWN
REL_DH
18000035-IEC19000440-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000440 V1 EN-US
Figure 36: TRIP 3 segment
Table 66: Signals TRIP 3
Signal In Out Source Drain
SOTF X SOTF
ZE_FOR_DIST X Binary input: ZExtension
AR_ZE X Binary input: ZExtensionarAR
MEAS_OR2 X Binary output: Meas Oreach
START_L1L2L3 X Binary output: Start L1+L2+L3
TRIP_STUB X STUB
Table continues on next page
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 87Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Signal In Out Source Drain
OC_D X Binary output: Trip O/C
MEAS_MAIN X Binary output: Meas Main
TRIP_PUTT X PUTT
TRIP_POTT X POTT
TRIP_BLOCK X BLOCK
HF_OFF X Setting: Com ModeTrip → HF_OFF =1
BIT_3P X TRIP2
BIT_L1 X TRIP1
BIT_L2 X TRIP1
BIT_L3 X TRIP1
DISTBL X SUPBL
M_OWN X BLOCK, POTT, PUTT
D X Binary output: TRIP CB
DL1 X Binary output: TRIP CB L1
DL2 X Binary output: TRIP CB L2
DL3 X Binary output: TRIP CB L3
Trip 4GUID-B6D5C506-FA0F-441A-8B86-1A14A44CB930 v1
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
AND
8
REL_DH
DL1
DL2
DL3
DH
DL1L2L3
D3PH
D1PH
18000036-IEC19000441-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000441 V1 EN-US
Figure 37: TRIP 4 segment
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
88 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Table 67: Signals TRIP 4
Signal In Out Source Drain
DL1 X Binary output: TRIP CB L1
DL2 X Binary output: TRIP CB L2
DL3 X Binary output: TRIP CB L3
REL_DH X TRIP3
DH X Binary output: Trip Com Rec
DL1L2L3 X Binary output: TRIP L1L2L3
D3PH X Binary output: Trip CB 3PH
D1PH X Binary output: Trip CB 1PH
Power swing blockingGUID-E4D40E54-C506-4C96-B702-3FF8969E6661 v1
The purpose of the power swing blocking function is to prevent unwanted tripping of thedistance protection function in response to power system instability with oscillatoryfluctuations of power (power swings) or loss of synchronism (out-of-step). The power swingblocking function does not influence the operation of the back-up overcurrent function.
When power swings occur, the electrical parameters of the system vary at a slower or fasterrate in relation to the angle δ be-tween the voltage vectors of the energy sources in differentparts of the system. In the case of a fault on the other hand, step changes of these parameterstake place. The parameters, which regardless of location are subject to appreciable variation inthe general region around phase opposition (δ = 180°), are the resistance R and the voltagecomponent U × cosϕ. The value of ϕ corresponds to the angle between phase voltage andcurrent.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 89Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
18000037-IEC19000442-1-en.vsdx
E1 U E2
U
I
E1 E2
Independent of: - relay location
- relay characteristics
- relay settings
U cos
U cos
IEC19000442 V1 EN-US
Figure 38: Power swing blocking
The voltage and current input variables are passed on to the evaluation system. The criterionfor pick-up of the power swing blocking function is the continuous variation of (U × cosϕ),which corresponds to the variation of real power in relation to current amplitude (P = I × U ×cosϕ). The value of (U × cosϕ) is determined after every zero-crossing of the current. Ablocking signal is generated, as soon as a repetitive variation of the value of (U × cosϕ) isdetected, that is, a variation must be detected at least three times to count as a power swing.
Two periods are needed to detect the faster power swings up to a frequency of 8 Hz. Thepower swing blocking function does not pick up during a fault, because the variation of (U ×cosϕ) in relation to time only occurs once and at a much higher rate than the function’soperating range.
Slow swings are evaluated over five periods by a second system. At its lowest operating limit,this system detects a frequency of 0.2 Hz.
Together the two systems cover a range from 0.2 to 8 Hz and no setting is required duringcommissioning.
The blocking signal PSB is maintained for as long as the distance protection function is in thepicked-up state. The power swing blocking function is only effective for the symmetrical three-phase condition and cannot block the distance function for asymmetrical faults (phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase faults).
A blocking signal is not issued, if the zero-crossings of the cur-rent signal occur at relativelyirregular intervals, because considerable differences between the zero-crossing intervals are aclear indication of a fault on the power system. Phase jumps in the current wave form occur at
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
90 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
the incidence of a fault, as a consequence of incorrect switching and when CT saturation takesplace. Since the currents during power swings are sinusoidal and do not contain a DCcomponent, it is permissible to assume that the problem of CT saturation does not arise.
Zero-crossings resulting from the slip are in any event excluded by the current enable settingof Imin.
5.2 Definite time over- and undercurrent protection 51(OCDT)
5.2.1 Mode of operationGUID-01B16DD6-3FA9-4079-9390-9204C842DAD9 v1
Over- and undercurrent function for:
• phase fault protection• backup protection• or for monitoring a current minimum
5.2.2 FeaturesGUID-0F07ECF4-7210-44FF-A17D-97F403D140FB v1
• Insensitive to DC component• Insensitive to harmonics• Single or three-phase measurement• Maximum respectively minimum value detection in the three-phase mode• Detection of inrush currents
5.2.3 Inputs and outputs
5.2.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-F644DFAA-0B84-4353-9F19-FE8FD67FE590 v1
• Current
5.2.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-AB3D1639-2EDC-4AE9-BE1B-DD3EA05AA4F9 v1
• Blocking
5.2.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-C0E2CC33-55E1-4C4F-84A0-CD307A90DA0A v1
• Pick-up• Tripping
5.2.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-AFB5BC3C-9DB7-450E-9C49-4CB7196297F7 v1
• Current amplitude
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 91Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.2.4 Function settingsGUID-C80D559E-594D-4F7B-B61E-4EA6723B603C v1
Table 68: Definite time current function - settings
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select)
Delay s 01.00 0.02 60.00 0.01
I-Setting IN 02.00 0.02 20.00 0.01
MaxMin MAX (1ph) (Select)
NrOfPhases 001 1 3 2
CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr 0
BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr
5.2.5 ParametersGUID-5E0B8E0E-A13D-4155-AF07-BF8DC0D4B0DF v1
Table 69: Definite time current function - parameters
Signal Description
ParSet 4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function isactive.
Delay Time between the function picking up and tripping.
I-Setting Pick-up current setting.Forbidden settings: >2.8 IN (when supplied from metering CT cores)
MaxMin Defines operation as overcurrent or undercurrent or with inrush blocking.Settings:
• MIN (3ph): Undercurrent. Three-phase functions detect the highest phasecurrent. Not permitted for single-phase functions.
• MIN (1ph): Undercurrent. Three-phase functions detect the lowest phasecurrent.
• MAX (3ph): Overcurrent. Three-phase functions detect the lowest phasecurrent. Not permitted for single-phase functions.
• MAX (1ph): Overcurrent. Three-phase functions detect the highest phasecurrent.
• MAX-Inrush: Blocks during inrush currents if one phase exceeds setting.
NrOfPhases Defines whether single or three-phase measurement.
CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel.All current I/P's may be selected.
BlockInp Input for blocking the function.
• F: not blocked• T: blocked• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Trip Tripping signal
Start Pick-up signal
5.2.6 ConfigurationGUID-AAEE593B-EAB3-4D4F-98C1-B0AE296307D5 v1
The following parameters have to be set:
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
92 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
I-Setting I-Setting
Delay Delay
Over orundercurrent
MaxMin
Number ofphases
NrOfPhases
Setting I-Setting
The current setting I-Setting must be sufficiently high to avoid any risk of false tripping orfalse signals under normal load conditions, but should be low enough to detect the lowestfault current that can occur. The margin which has to be allowed between the maximum short-time load current and the setting must allow for:
• the tolerance on the current setting• the reset ratio
The maximum short-time load current has to be determined according to the power systemconditions and must take switching operations and load surges into account.
18000038-IEC19000443-1-en.vsdx
I
0 t
I
N I
I - Setting
Delay
IEC19000443 V1 EN-US
Figure 39: Operating characteristic of the definite time over-current function
Compensating any difference between the rated currents of CT IN1 and protected unit IGN isrecommended. This is achieved with the aid of the reference value of the A/D channel or bycorrecting the overcurrent setting.
For example, for IGN = 800 A and IN1 = 1000 A, the setting for a pick-up current of 1.5 IGN = 1200A should be:
1
8001.5 1.5 1.2
1000
GN
N
I A
I A
CurrentInp
An interposing CT in the input is essential for current settings lower than 0.2 IN.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 93Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Delay
The delay is used to achieve discrimination of the overcurrent function. It is set according tothe grading table for all the over-current units on the power system. The zone of protection ofthe overcurrent function under consideration extends to the location of the next downstreamovercurrent relay.
Should the downstream relay fail to clear a fault, the overcurrent function trips slightly later ina backup role.
Setting MaxMin
This parameter enables the following operating modes to be selected:
• MIN (3ph): Pick-up when the highest phase current also falls below the setting. Thissetting is not permitted for single-phase meas.
• MIN (1ph): Pick-up when the lowest phase current falls be-low the setting.• MAX (3ph): Pick-up when the lowest phase current also exceeds the setting. This setting is
not permitted for single-phase measurement.• MAX (1ph): Pick-up when the highest phase current exceeds the setting.• MAX-Inrush: Blocking of inrush currents when a phase current exceeds the setting.
Operation of the inrush blocking feature (parameter MaxMin set to MAX-Inrush)
The inrush detector picks up and blocks operation of the function when the amplitude of thefundamental component of the current exceeds the current function setting.
The inrush detector is based on the evaluation of the second harmonic component of thecurrent I2h in relation to the fundamental frequency component I1h (evaluation of theamplitudes).
The output of the function is disabled when the ratio I2h/I1h exceeds 10% and enabled againwhen it falls below 8%.
There is no setting for the peak value of I2h/I1h.
The function can operate with inrush blocking in both the single and three-phase mode(parameter NrOfPhase).
In the three-phase mode, the phase used for evaluation is the one with the highest amplitudeat rated frequency (pick-up and inrush detection).
5.3 Inverse time overcurrent protection 51 (OC)
5.3.1 Mode of operationGUID-FF80694B-B995-460F-9783-D6B0A852D201 v1
Overcurrent function with time delay inversely proportional to the current and definiteminimum tripping time.
5.3.2 FeaturesGUID-4BAE5289-4B64-4659-94DF-02DEB395E65A v1
• Operating characteristics according to British Standard 142:
• c = 0.02: normal inverse• c = 1 : very inverse and long time earth fault• c = 2 : extremely inverse
• Insensitive to DC component• Insensitive to harmonics
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
94 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
• Single or three-phase measurement• Detection of the highest phase value in the three-phase mode• Wider setting range than specified in BS 142
5.3.3 Inputs and outputs
5.3.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-BDDCFC86-141F-4BD9-B447-DED9D2056EBF v1
• Current
5.3.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-E49D975A-D235-4CD5-8D22-B2C3837A8E0C v1
• Blocking
5.3.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-EA349950-3CA6-4BAA-B95A-9C51B48004EE v1
• Pick-up• Tripping
5.3.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-C864F19B-CB26-4E35-81D0-736E8B679554 v1
• Current amplitude
5.3.4 Function settingsGUID-784F9416-151F-42BE-9371-39A4C1D7E75F v1
Table 70: Inverse time overcurrent function - settings
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
ParSet4..1 P1 (Select)
c-Setting 1.00 (Select)
k1-Setting s 013.5 0.01 200.0 0.01
IStart IB 1.10 1.00 4.00 0.01
t-min s 00.00 0.0 10.0 0.1
NrOfPhases 1 1 3 2
CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr 0
IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.04 2.50 0.01
BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 95Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.3.5 ParametersGUID-C69B399C-AE92-4B1F-A77C-5D8DAB1F4433 v1
Table 71: Inverse time overcurrent function - parameters
Signal Description
ParSet4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function isactive.
c-Setting Setting for the exponential factor determining the operating characteristicaccording to BS 142 or for selecting the RXIDG characteristic.
k1-Setting Constant determining the parallel shift of the characteristic (time grading).
IStart Pick-up current at which the characteristic becomes effective.
t-min Definite minimum tripping time.
NrOfPhases Defines the number of phases measured.
CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel.All current I/P's may be selected.
IB-Setting Base current for taking account of differences of rated current IN.
BlockInp Defines the input for an external blocking signal.
• F: not used• T: function always blocked• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions).
Trip Tripping signal.
Start Pick-up signal.
5.3.6 ConfigurationGUID-0F3EB64C-C409-4C95-8E7F-CA8E1DE3A970 v1
The following parameters have to be set:
Base current IB-Setting
Characteristicenabling current
IStart
Type ofcharacteristic
c-Setting
Multiplier k1-Setting
The Inverse time overcurrent function is used to protect transformers, feeders and loads ofthe auxiliaries supply system against phase and earth faults. The function responds largelyonly to the fundamental component of the fault current.
Base current IB-Setting
The function does not have a fixed current setting above which it operates and below which itdoes not, as does a definite time-overcurrent relay. Instead, its operating characteristic isselected such that it is always above the load current. To this end, the relay has a referencecurrent IB that is set the same as the load current of the protected unit IB1. The referencecurrent IB determines the relative position of the relay characteristic which is enabled when thecurrent exceeds the reference current by a given amount (IStart). By setting the referencecurrent IB to equal the load current of the protected unit IB1 instead of its rated current, for
IB1 < IN of the protected unit: the protection is more sensitive
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
96 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
IB1 > IN of the protected unit: the protection permits maxi-mum utilization of the thermalcapability of the protected unit
For example,
• Load current of protected unit IB1 = 800 A• CT rated current IN1 = 1000 A
IN2 = 5 A• Relay rated current IN = 5 A
Relay reference current IB-Setting: Setting:
21
1
5800 4
1000
NB B
N
I AI I A A
I A
40.8
5
B
N
I A
I A
An alternative is to adjust the characteristic to match the rated load of the protected unit andset the reference current to its rated current instead of its load current.
Enabling the characteristic IStart
The characteristic is enabled when the current exceeds the setting IStart. A typical setting forIStart is 1.1 IB.
Choice of characteristic c-Setting
The constant c-Setting determines the shape of the characteristic. The settings for thestandard characteristics according to BS 142 are:
normal inverse: c = 0.02
very inverse and long time earthfault:
c = 1.00
extremely inverse: c = 2.00
t
I
IStart
IB
t =
k1
I
IB
c
1
tmin
18000039-IEC19000444-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000444 V1 EN-US
Figure 40: Operating characteristic of the inverse time overcurrent function
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 97Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
c-Setting can also be set to RXIDG, in which case the function’s inverse characteristiccorresponds to that of the relay type RXIDG.
t [s] = 5.8 - 1.35 LN (I / IB)
The parameter k1-Setting has no influence in this case.
Multiplier k1-Setting
The multiplier ‘k1-Setting’ enables the characteristic to be shifted. This is used for grading aseries of relays along a line to achieve discrimination.
For example, in the case of the “very inverse” characteristic, the constant c = 1 and the factork1 ≤ 13.5. The operating time t is given by the equation
1
1B
kt
I
I
Assuming a grading time of 0.5 s at 6 times the base current IB is required, the factor k1 foreach of the relays is given by
k1 = 5 t
For operating times between 0.5 and 2.5 s, this results in the following settings for k1:
t [s] k1 [s]
0.5 2.5
1 5
1.5 7.5
2 10
2,5 12.5
The characteristics according to BS 142 are set as follows:
• normal inverse: k1 = 0.14 s• very inverse: k1 = 13.5 s• extremely inverse: k1 = 80 s• long time earth fault: k1 = 120 s
Typical settings
• IB-Setting corresponding to load current of the protected unit• IStart 1.1 IB• c-Setting according to desired characteristic for the protected unit• k1-Setting according to the time grading calculation• tmin 0.00
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
98 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.4 Directional overcurrent definite time protection 67(DIROCDT)
5.4.1 Mode of operationGUID-65CB2975-ADFB-4D2B-8923-3A0C57A02EB7 v1
Directional overcurrent function:
• detecting phase faults on ring lines• detecting phase faults on double-circuit lines with an infeed at one end• backup protection for a distance protection scheme
5.4.2 FeaturesGUID-0502CD95-362C-4826-9B26-32533106C57C v1
• Directional phase fault protection• Insensitive to DC component• Insensitive to harmonics• Voltage memory feature for close faults
5.4.3 Inputs and outputs
5.4.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-B92FE713-87AB-48C5-B7E3-B2C694BEF819 v1
• Current• Voltage
5.4.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-35EB42DC-C990-4FAD-A2BB-F917C4FD096A v1
• Blocking• PLC receive
5.4.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-4742C8ED-8E75-406E-8618-E7BF2947A0F1 v1
• Start• Start L1• Start L2• Start L3• Forwards measurement• Backwards measurement• Tripping
5.4.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-67F086A8-8A33-44FD-AC5C-097F44217914 v1
• Current amplitude of the three phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3)• Active power• A positive measurement indicates the forwards direction (IL1 × UL2L3, IS × UL3L1, IL3 ×
UL1L2)• Voltage amplitude of the phase-to-phase voltages (UL2L3, UL3L1, UL1L2)
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 99Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.4.4 Function settingsGUID-06F853AD-FD0E-4322-8662-E2E4E857BA98 v1
Table 72: Directional overcurrent definite time function - settings
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
ParSet4..1 P1 (Select)
CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr CT I1-I3
VoltageInp CT/VT-Addr VT U1-U3
I-Setting IN 2.00 0.20 20.00 0.01
Angle Deg 45 -180 +180 15
Delay s 1.00 0.02 60.00 0.01
tWait s 0.20 0.02 20.00 0.01
MemDirMode Select Trip (Select)
MemDuration s 2.00 0.20 60.00 0.01
Receive BinaryAddr Always on
Ext Block BinaryAddr Always off
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr
Start L1 SignalAddr
Start L2 SignalAddr
Start L3 SignalAddr
MeasFwd SignalAddr
MeasBwd SignalAddr
5.4.5 ParametersGUID-99FB9719-852F-4D10-A8C8-3BC3F9811CE2 v1
Table 73: Directional overcurrent definite time function - parameters
Signal Description
ParSet4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function isactive.
CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel. Only three-phase CTs can be set.
VoltageInp Defines the VT input channel. Only three-phase VTs can be set.
I-Setting Pick-up setting for tripping.
Angle Characteristic angle.
Delay Delay between pick-up and tripping.
tWait Time allowed for the directional decision to be received from the opposite endin a blocking scheme.
MemDirMode Determines the response of the protection after the time set for memorizingpower direction:
• trip• block
MemDuration Time during which the power direction last determined remains valid.
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
100 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Signal Description
Receive Input for the signal from the opposite end of the line:
• T: not used• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Ext Block • F: not blocked• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Trip Tripping signal.
Start Pick-up signal.
Start L1 L1 phase pick-up signal
Start L2 L2 phase pick-up signal
Start L3 L3 phase pick-up signal
MeasFwd Signals measurement in the forwards direction.
MeasBwd Signals measurement in the backwards direction.
5.4.6 ConfigurationGUID-5C6F55A5-DC42-47E0-AA26-B7C71F60D35A v1
The following parameters have to be set:
• Pick-up current I-Setting• Characteristic angle Angle• Delay Delay• Time allowed for receipt of signal tWait• Response at the end of the memorized power direction time MemDirMode• Time during which the memorized direction is valid MemDuration
Pick-up value I-Setting
I-Setting must be selected high enough to prevent false tripping or alarms from taking placeand low enough to reliably detect the minimum fault current. The setting must be more thanthe maximum transient load current and allow for:
• CT and relay inaccuracies• the reset ratio
The maximum transient load current has to be determined according to the power systemoperating conditions and take account of switching operations and load surges.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 101Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
I
0 t
I
I N
I - Setting
Delay
18000040-IEC19000445-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000445 V1 EN-US
Figure 41: Operating characteristic of the definite time over-current detector
Where the rated CT current IN1 differs from the rated current IGN of the protected unit,compensating the measurement to achieve a match is recommended. This is done bycorrecting either the reference value of the A/D input or the setting.
For example, assuming IGN = 800 A and IN1 = 1000 A, the setting to pick up at 1.5 IGN = 1200 Ashould be:
1
8001.5 1.5 1.2
1000
GN
N
I A
I A
Characteristic angle
Determining the phase-angle of the current provides an additional criterion for preservingdiscrimination compared with non-directional overcurrent protection. The directionalsensitivity is ±180° in relation to the reference voltage. This is illustrated in the followingdiagram.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
102 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
18000041-IEC19000446-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000446 V1 EN-US
Figure 42: Directional characteristic
The function determines the power direction by measuring the phase-angle of the current inrelation to the opposite phase-to-phase voltage. Which current is compared with whichvoltage can be seen from the following table:
Table 74: Currents, voltages used for determination of power direction
Current input Phase-to-neutral voltage Calculated voltage
IL1 UL2, UL3 UL2L3 = UL2 - UL3
IL2 UL3, UL1 UL3L1 = UL3 - UL1
IL3 UL1, UL2 UL1L2 = UL1 - UL2
The voltage measurement automatically compensates the group of connection of the VTs. Forexample, the phase-to-phase values are calculated for Y-connected VTs (VT type UTS), whilethe input voltages are used directly for delta-connected VTs (VT type UTD).
Delay
The delay enables the protection to be graded with other time-overcurrent relays to achievediscrimination. Its setting is thus chosen in relation to the timer settings of upstream anddown-stream protective devices. The zone of protection covered by the overcurrent protectionextends to the next overcurrent protection device.
Should in the event of a fault in the next downstream zone, the protection for that zone fail,this protection function takes over after the time set for Delay and clears the fault in a backuprole.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 103Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Time allowed for a signal to be received
Where directional functions are configured in both line terminals, each can send a signal fromthe MeasBwd output to the Receive input of the function at the opposite end of the line (forexample, via a PLC channel) when it is measuring a fault in the reverse direction. This signalprevents the respective directional overcurrent function from tripping, because the faultcannot be in the zone between them. The functions therefore have to allow time, that is, thewait time, for the signal from the opposite line terminal to be received. If none is receivedwithin tWait, the circuit-breakers are tripped at both ends.
The time set for Delay acts in this type of scheme as a backup, which does not rely on thecommunication channel. Thus, when the Receive input is being used, the setting for Delaymust be longer than the setting for tWait:
Delay > tWait
Response after decay of the memorized voltage
The voltage measured by the protection can quickly decay to almost zero for a close fault andmake determining direction unreliable. For this reason, the function includes a voltagememory feature which for the first 200 milliseconds after the start of an overcurrentmemorizes the voltage measured immediately before it and this is used as reference todetermine fault direction. After this time, the last valid direction is used for an adjustableperiod.
MemDirMode provides facility for setting how the protection must respond after this time orin the event that the circuit-breaker is closed onto a fault and no voltage could be memorizedbeforehand. The two possible settings are the protection can trip or it can block.
Time during which the memorized direction is valid
The MemDuration setting determines how long the last valid direction measurement shall beused. The setting should be as short as possible (200 ms) when the function is being used asbackup for a distance function in an HV power system, because an actually measured voltageis only available during this time and therefore it is only possible to detect a reversal ofdirection during this time. For longer settings, the last valid power direction is used instead ofthe actually memorized voltage.
5.5 Directional overcurrent inverse time protection 67(DIROCINV)
5.5.1 Mode of operationGUID-F34E6B2E-4EEB-4BDC-BB79-7CDA8BE8C034 v1
Directional inverse time overcurrent function for:
• detecting phase faults on ring lines• detecting phase faults on double-circuit lines with an infeed at one end• backup protection for a distance protection scheme
5.5.2 FeaturesGUID-DF5218ED-8A78-4AB6-BB78-13B1B75FFC11 v1
• Directionally sensitive three-phase phase fault protection• Operating characteristics according to British Standard BS 142:
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
104 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
c = 0.02 : normal inverse
c = 1 : very inverse and long time earth fault
c = 2 : extremely inverse
• Insensitive to DC component• Insensitive to harmonics• Voltage memory feature for close faults
5.5.3 Inputs and outputs
5.5.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-BF590066-EAD6-44A1-93E8-312890FCE7E0 v1
• Current• Voltage
5.5.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-BD06D555-60CE-4A51-9077-81CE1142256E v1
• Blocking• PLC receive
5.5.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-C59C9A87-BD2E-4EE1-9A71-847ADC642458 v1
• Start• Start L1• Start L2• Start L3• Forwards measurement• Backwards measurement• Tripping
5.5.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-D59AA2D3-FAEF-4F61-B7A1-1C8C6BA71BB7 v1
• Current amplitudeAmplitude of the three-phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3)
• Active powerA positive measurement indicates the forwards direction (IL1 × UL2L3, IL2 × UL3L1, IL3 × UL1L2)
• Voltage amplitudeAmplitudes of the phase-to-phase voltages (UL2L3, UL3L1, UL1L2)
5.5.4 Function settingsGUID-E0DE2E94-EF62-4944-AE37-55CC917D3A30 v1
Table 75: Directional overcurrent inverse time function - settings
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
ParSet4..1 P1 (Select)
CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr CT I1-I3
VoltageInp CT/VT-Addr VT U1-U3
I-Setting IN 2.00 0.20 20.00 0.01
Angle Deg 45 -180 +180 15
Table continues on next page
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 105Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
Delay s 1.00 0.02 60.00 0.01
tWait s 0.20 0.02 20.00 0.01
MemDirMode Select Trip (Select)
MemDuration s 2.00 0.20 60.00 0.01
Receive BinaryAddr Always on
Ext Block BinaryAddr Always off
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr
Start L1 SignalAddr
Start L2 SignalAddr
Start L3 SignalAddr
MeasFwd SignalAddr
MeasBwd SignalAddr
5.5.5 ParametersGUID-DF58F896-C3D7-4D23-98CE-4191FF983E9D v1
Table 76: Directional overcurrent inverse time function - parameters
Signal Description
ParSet4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function isactive
CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel. Only three-phase CTs can be set
VoltageInp Defines the VT input channel. Only three-phase VTs can be set
I-Setting Pick-up current at which the characteristic becomes effective
Angle Characteristic angle
c-Setting Setting for the exponential factor determining the operating characteristicaccording to BS 142
k1-Setting Constant determining the parallel shift of the characteristic (time grading)
t-min Definite minimum operating time, operating characteristic constant
IB-Setting Base current for taking account of differences of rated current IN
twait Time allowed for the directional decision to be received
MemDirMode determines the response of the protection after the time set for memorizingpower direction:
• trip• block
MemDuration Time during which the power direction last determined remains valid.
Receive Input for the signal from the opposite end of the line:
• T: not used• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Ext Block • F: not blocked• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Trip Tripping signal
Start Pick-up signal
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
106 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Signal Description
Start L1 L1 phase pick-up signal
Start L2 L2 phase pick-up signal
Start L3 L3 phase pick-up signal
MeasFwd Signals measurement in the forwards direction
MeasBwd Signals measurement in the backwards direction
5.5.6 ConfigurationGUID-B154716D-1084-4355-AAFC-CE606CA7C94E v1
The following parameters have to be set:
Base current IB-Setting
Characteristic enabling current IStart
Type of characteristic c-Setting
Multiplier k1-Setting
Characteristic angle Angle
Time allowed for receipt of signal tWait
Response at the end of the memorized power direction time MemDirMode
Time during which the memorized direction is valid MemDuration
Base current IB-Setting
A tripping current is not set on a directional overcurrent inverse function as it is on a definitetime overcurrent function. Instead the position of the characteristic is chosen such that it isabove the load current. The function, however, has a base current setting, which is set to thefull load current IB1 of the protected unit. The base current setting determines the position ofthe basic characteristic. The characteristic is enabled when the base current is exceeded by apreset amount (IStart). The adjustment of the base current IB to the load current IB1 of theprotected unit instead of its rated current enables for:
• IB1 < rated current of prot. unit: more sensitive protection• IB1 > rated current of prot. unit: maximum utilization of the thermal capability of the
protected unit
For example:
• Load current of the protected unit IB1 = 800 A• CT rated current IN1 = 1000 A• IN2 = 5 A• Protection rated current IN = 5 A
Protection base current: Setting:
21
1
5800 4
1000
NB B
N
I AI I A A
I A
40.8
5
B
N
I A
I A
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 107Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
An alternative is to adjust the position of the characteristic to match the rated load of theprotected unit and set the base current to its rated current instead of its load current.
Enabling the characteristic IStart
The characteristic is enabled when the current exceeds the setting IStart. A typical setting forIStart is 1.1 IB.
Choice of characteristic c-Setting
The constant c-Setting determines the shape of the characteristic.
The settings for the standard characteristics according to BS 142 are:
normal inverse: c = 0.02
very inverse and long timeearth fault:
c = 1.00
extremely inverse: c = 2.00
t
I
IStart
IB
t =
k1
I
IB
c
1
tmin18000042-IEC19000447-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000447 V1 EN-US
Figure 43: Operating characteristic of the directional overcurrent inverse time function
Multiplier k1-Setting
The multiplier k1-Setting enables the directional overcurrent inverse time characteristic to beshifted. This is used for grading a series of relays along a line to achieve discrimination.
For example, in the case of the very inverse characteristic, the constant c = 1 and the factor k1 ≤13.5. The operating time t is given by the equation:
1
1B
kt
I
I
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
108 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Assuming a grading time of 0.5 s at 6 times the base current IB is required, the factor k1 foreach of the relays is given by,
k1 = 5 t
For operating times between 0.5 and 2.5 s, this results in the following settings for k1:
t [s] k1 [s]
0.5 2.5
1 5
1.5 7.5
2 10
2,5 12.5
The characteristics according to BS 142 are set as follows:
normal inverse: k1 = 0.14 s
very inverse: k1 = 13.5 s
extremely inverse: k1 = 80 s
long time earth fault: k1 = 120 s
Characteristic angle
Determining the phase-angle of the current provides an additional criterion for preservingdiscrimination compared with non-directional overcurrent protection. The directionalsensitivity is ±180° in relation to the reference voltage. This is illustrated in the followingdiagram.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 109Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
18000044-IEC19000449-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000448 V1 EN-US
Figure 44: Directional characteristic
The function determines the power direction by measuring the phase-angle of the current inrelation to the opposite phase-to-phase voltage. Which current is compared with whichvoltage can be seen from the following table:
Table 77: Currents, voltages used for determination of power direction
Current input Phase-to-neutral voltage Calculated voltage
IL1 UL2, UL3 UL2L3 = UL2 - UL3
IL2 UL3, UL1 UL3L1 = UL3 - UL1
IL3 UL1, UL2 UL1L2 = UL1 - UL2
The voltage measurement automatically compensates the group of connection of the VTs. Forexample, the phase-to-phase values are calculated for Y-connected VTs (VT type UTS), whilethe input voltages are used directly for delta-connected VTs (VT type UTD).
Time allowed for a signal to be received
Where directional functions are configured in both line terminals, each can send a signal fromthe MeasBwd output to the Receive input of the function at the opposite end of the line (forexample, via a PLC channel) when it is measuring a fault in the reverse direction. This signalprevents the respective directional overcurrent function from tripping, because the faultcannot be in the zone between them. The functions therefore have to allow time, that is, thewait time, for the signal from the opposite line terminal to be received. If none is receivedwithin tWait, the circuit -breakers are tripped at both ends.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
110 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
The time set for Delay acts in this kind of scheme as a backup which does not rely on thecommunication channel. Thus when the Receive input is being used, the setting for Delay mustbe longer than the setting for tWait:
Delay > tWait
Response after decay of the memorized voltage
The voltage measured by the protection can quickly decay to almost zero for a close fault andmake determining direction unreliable. For this reason, the function includes a voltagememory feature and for the first 200 milliseconds after the incidence of an overcurrent, thevoltage measured immediately before the fault is used as reference to determine faultdirection.
After this time, the last valid direction is used for an adjustable period.
MemDirMode provides facility for setting how the protection must respond after this time orin the event that the circuit-breaker is closed onto a fault and no voltage could be memorizedbeforehand. The two possible settings are the protection can trip or it can block.
Time during which the memorized direction is valid
The MemDuration setting determines how long the last valid direction measurement shall beused. The setting should be as short as possible (200 ms) when the function is being used asbackup for a distance function in an HV power system, because an actually measured voltageis only available during this time and therefore it is only possible to detect a reversal ofdirection during this time. For longer settings, the last valid power direction is used instead ofthe actually memorized voltage.
5.6 Definite time over- and undervoltage protection 59/27(OVDT)
5.6.1 Mode of operationGUID-F6B02B2E-018D-461C-B3B6-4D6EE83D2E82 v1
Standard voltage applications (overvoltage and undervoltage function)
5.6.2 FeaturesGUID-DCE098A7-D900-43B1-A3F8-4C2F1CC68D9B v1
• Insensitive to DC component• Insensitive to harmonics• Single or three-phase voltage measurement• Maximum value, respectively minimum value detection in the three-phase mode
5.6.3 Inputs and outputs
5.6.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-200D6EFF-67E4-44C5-9699-9B30B2E6D32A v1
• Voltage
5.6.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-41F14722-531C-4106-8B7E-A60E806F41C3 v1
• Blocking
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 111Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.6.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-5275B141-2101-42B7-AD0D-978F0A957C8B v1
• Pick-up• Tripping
5.6.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-F4ACA098-AEAB-4E13-AB3C-962041125C10 v1
• Voltage amplitude
5.6.4 Function settingsGUID-72811AEC-9706-47BE-8109-C03D393F0379 v1
Table 78: Definite time over- and undervoltage function - settings
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select)
Delay s 02.00 0.02 60.00 0.01
V-setting UN 1.200 0.010 2.000 0.002
MaxMin MAX (1ph) (Select)
NrOfPhases 001 1 3 2
VoltageInp AnalogAddr 0
BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr
5.6.5 ParametersGUID-7D6408F1-C98B-4A4E-8DA6-0958CF9614AA v1
Table 79: Definite time over- and undervoltage function - parameters
Signal Description
ParSet4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function is active
Delay Time delay between the function picking up and tripping
V-setting Voltage setting for tripping
MaxMin Over- or undervoltage mode selection:Settings:
• MIN (3ph): Undervoltage. Three-phase functions detect the highest phasevoltage. Not permitted for single-phase functions.
• MIN (1ph): Undervoltage. Three-phase functions detect the lowest phasevoltage.
• MAX (3ph): Overvoltage. Three-phase functions detect the lowest phasevoltage. Not permitted for single-phase functions.
• MAX (1ph): Overvoltage.Three-phase functions detect the highest phasevoltage.
NrOfPhases Number of phases included in the measurement.
VoltageInp Analogue input channelAll the voltage channels are available for selection.
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
112 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Signal Description
BlockInp Input for blocking the function.
• F: not blocked• T: blocked• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Trip Tripping signal
Start Pick-up signal
5.6.6 ConfigurationGUID-3BEB8035-50E3-42E4-A31B-F0BF4F40B9CB v1
The following parameters have to be set:
Setting V-setting
Delay Delay
Over or undervoltage MaxMin
Number of phases NrOfPhases
Two of these functions are frequently applied in a two-stage scheme. The first stage detectslower prolonged overvoltages while the second guards against higher overvoltages, whichhave to be cleared quickly.
Pick-up voltage (V-setting)
Single-phase VT: A setting of 1.3 UN corresponds to a pick-up voltage of 130 V at the input ofthe VT.
Y-connected three-phase VTs: A setting of 1.3 UN corresponds to a pick-up voltage of 130V / √3at the input of the VT(phase-to-neutral voltage).
Compensating any difference between the rated voltages of VTs UN1 and protected unit UGN isrecommended. This is achieved with the aid of the reference value of the A/D channel or bycorrecting the voltage setting.
For example, for UGN = 12 kV and UN1 = 15 kV, the setting for a pick-up voltage of 1.4 UGN shouldbe:
1
121.4 1.4 1.12
15
GN
N
U kV
U kV
MaxMin
This parameter provides a choice of the following settings:
• MIN (3ph): Protection picks up when all three-phase voltages have fallen below setting.• MIN (1ph): Protection picks up when the lowest of the phase voltages falls below setting.• MAX (3ph): Protection picks up when all three-phase voltages have exceeded setting.• MAX (1ph): Protection picks up when the highest of the phase voltages exceeds setting.
Operating characteristic of a two-stage overvoltage protection
(UN = rated relay voltage)
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 113Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
180000044-IEC19000449-1-en.vsdx
Stage 1
Stage 2 V-Setting
UN
U
t Delay Delay
V-Setting
IEC19000449 V1 EN-US
Figure 45: Operating characteristic of a two-stage overvoltage protection
Typical settings:
1st stage:
V-setting 1.15 UN
Delay 2 s
MaxMin MAX (1ph)
2nd stage:
V-setting 1.4 UN
Delay 0.1 s
MaxMin MAX (1ph)
5.7 Synchrocheck 25 (SYNC)
5.7.1 Mode of operationGUID-213AD84F-1A1E-4464-BD6F-19471C0152F5 v1
Checking the synchronization criteria (amplitudes, phase-shift and frequency difference) oftwo electrical systems and, providing the corresponding limits are satisfied, enabling them tobe connected in parallel.
5.7.2 FeaturesGUID-77360B06-0E90-4F91-9363-5FA0E9CF3BA9 v1
• Monitoring synchronism:Single-phase voltage measurement.Comparison of the voltages (dU), phase-shift (dPh) and frequencies (df) of two voltagevectors. Calculation of the corresponding differences between the voltage vectors in thecomplex plane.Evaluation of the fundamental frequency components of the voltage signals (afterfiltering of harmonic and DC components).
• Monitoring voltage:
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
114 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
• Busbar voltage — single-phase voltage measurement• Line voltage — single or three-phase voltage measurement
Evaluation of instantaneous values (non-digitally filtered analogue signals) resulting in alarge permissible frequency range. Detection of the largest and smallest of the three-phase voltages in the case of three-phase measurement.No filtering of harmonics or DC component.
• Choice of phase for the voltage inputs on busbar and line sides (for amplitude and phase-angle adjustment).
• Additional voltage input (for use in double busbar stations) with provision for remoteswitchover.
• Provision for remote selecting the operating mode.
5.7.3 Inputs and outputs
5.7.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-B6579214-65E0-4A16-8A18-2349524AA637 v1
• Voltages (2 or 3 single or three-phase inputs) for:
• uBusInput1, uBusInput2 — single-phase• uLineInput — single or three-phase
5.7.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-15699343-8DDD-4FB4-A0A1-7DD8B563FD8F v1
• 2 inputs for enabling the synchrocheck function (ReleaseInp1 and ReleaseInp2)• 3 inputs for interlocking the synchrocheck O/Ps (BlckTrigBus1, BlckTrigBus2 and
BlckTrigLine)• 1 input for bypassing the synchrocheck function (OverridSync)• 2 inputs for remotely selecting operating mode (OpModeInp1 and OpModeInp2)• 2 inputs for remotely switching voltage channels in double busbar stations (uBus1Activ
and uBus2Activ)
5.7.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-83C56EC6-18F3-47A2-B316-731024859B8B v1
• Function pick-up (Start)• Circuit-breaker closing enable signal (PermitToClos)• Function disabled signal (SyncBlockd)• Enable output blocked signal (TrigBlockd)• Synchrocheck bypassed signal (OverridSync)• Amplitude difference in permissible range (AmplDifOK)• Phase-shift in permissible range (PhaseDifOK)• Frequency difference in permissible range (FreqDifOK)• Busbars energized (LiveBus)• Busbars de-energized (DeadBus)• Line energized (LiveLine)• Line de-energized (DeadLine)
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 115Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.7.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-E7D295D8-0041-4598-9D4D-135C13AB5E80 v1
Synchronism check (single-phase)
Voltage amplitude difference (|dU|) = |UBus - ULine|
Phase-shift (dPh) = PhBusbar - PhLine
Frequency difference (|df|) = |fBus - fLine|
Voltage check (single or three-phase)
• Max. busbar voltage (MaxuBus)• Min. busbar voltage (MinuBus)• Max. line voltage (MaxuLine)• Min. line voltage (MinuLine)
Single-phase: max. voltage = min. voltage
Three-phase: max. voltage = max. phase-to-phase voltage
min. voltage = min. phase-to-phase voltage
5.7.4 Function settingsGUID-6C0DF96A-18C4-4CC6-9AE8-078FDDBC55CA v1
Table 80: Synchrocheck function - settings
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
ParSet 1..4 P1 (Select)
maxVoltDif UN 0.20 0.05 0.40 0.05
maxPhaseDif deg 10.0 05.0 80.0 05.0
maxFreqDif Hz 0.20 0.05 0.40 0.05
minVoltage UN 0.70 0.60 1.00 0.05
maxVoltage UN 0.30 0.10 1.00 0.05
Operat.-Mode only SynChck (Select)
supervisTime s 0.20 0.05 5.00 0.05
t-Reset s 0.05 0.00 1.00 0.05
uBusInp-Ph 1ph L1-L2 (Select)
uBusInput1 AnalogAddr 0
uBusInput2 AnalogAddr 0
uLineInp-Ph 1ph L1-L2 (Select)
uLineInput AnalogAddr 0
uBus1Activ BinaryAddr Always on
uBus2Activ BinaryAddr Always off
ReleaseInp1 BinaryAddr Always on
ReleaseInp2 BinaryAddr Always off
BlckTrigBus1 BinaryAddr Always off
BlckTrigBus2 BinaryAddr Always off
BlckTrigLine BinaryAddr Always off
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
116 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
OverridSync BinaryAddr Always off
OpModeInp1 BinaryAddr Always off
OpModeInp2 BinaryAddr Always off
PermitToClos SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr
SyncBlockd SignalAddr
TrigBlockd SignalAddr
SyncOverrid SignalAddr
AmplDifOK SignalAddr
PhaseDifOK SignalAddr
FreqDifOK SignalAddr
LiveBus SignalAddr
DeadBus SignalAddr
LiveLine SignalAddr
DeadLine SignalAddr
5.7.5 ParametersGUID-807730B5-4894-45C2-AAE8-1A6B658C4617 v1
Table 81: Synchrocheck function - parameters
Signal Description
ParSet 4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters aparticular function is active.
maxVoltDif Max. permissible voltage difference |dU| between the phasesused for checking synchronism.
maxPhaseDif Max. permissible phase-shift |dPh| between the voltages ofthe phases used for checking synchronism.
maxFreqDif Max. permissible difference of frequency |df| between thephases used for checking synchronism.
minVoltage Voltage level for discriminating between busbar and linebeing live (lowest phase voltage in the case of three-phasemeasurement).
maxVoltage Voltage level for discriminating between busbar and linebeing dead (highest phase voltage in the case of three-phasemeasurement).
Table continues on next page
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 117Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Signal Description
Operat.-Mode Possible synchrocheck operating modes:
• SynChck only: Synchrocheck [Synchrocheck conditionsfulfilled AND (bus live AND line live)]
• BusD AND LineL: Synchrocheck OR (bus dead AND linelive)
• BusL AND LineD: Synchrocheck OR (bus live AND linedead)
• BusD XOR LineD: Synchrocheck OR (bus dead AND linelive) OR (bus live AND line dead)
• BusD AND LineD: Synchrocheck OR (bus dead AND linedead)
• BusD OR LineD: Synchrocheck OR (bus dead OR linedead)
• BusD: Synchrocheck OR (bus dead)• LineD: Synchrocheck OR (line dead)
supervisTime Period between the function picking up and it issuing the CBclose enable (PermitToClos).All the conditions forsynchronism must remain fulfilled during this time,otherwise the function is reset.
t-Reset Reset time following the non-fulfillment of one or moresynchronism conditions.
uBusInp-Ph Choice of phase I/P on the busbar side.Possible settings: 1 ph L1L2, L2L3 or L3L1; 1 ph L1E, L2E or L3EThe phase chosen must agree with the voltage input channelselected (that is, uBusInput1 and, if selected, uBusInput2).
uBusInput1 1st voltage I/P channel on the busbar side.This must agree with the phase chosen (uBusInp-Ph).
uBusInput2 2nd voltage input channel (if applicable) on the busbar side.This must agree with the chosen phase (uBusInp-Ph) andmust agree with the voltage of uBusInput1. If a second inputis not configured, the function only takes account of the firstvoltage I/P channel (uBusInput1).
uLineInp-Ph Choice of phase input on the line side.Possible settings:1 ph L1L2, L2L3 or L3L1; 1 ph L1E, L2E or L3E; 3 ph Y; 3 ph ΔThe phase chosen must agree with the voltage I/P channelselected (that is, uLineInput).
uLineInput Voltage input channel on the line side.This must agree with the chosen phase (uLineInp-Ph).
uBus1Activ, uBus2Activ1)
Binary inputs for remote switching between voltage inputchannels connected to double busbars (mimic busbar).These inputs shall be applied only if the second busbar inputchannel has been configured (‘uBusInput2’).
• F: input disabled• T: input enabled• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
118 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Signal Description
ReleaseInp1ReleaseInp2
Binary inputs for enabling the synchrocheck function(internal OR gate, that is, at least one of the inputs has to beset to TRUE (T) or controlled by a binary input to enable theoutput). If both inputs are FALSE (F), the function does notrun, that is, the supervision algorithm is not processed.These inputs are used where the synchrocheck function isonly needed at certain times (for example, in autoreclosureschemes).
• F: synchrocheck function disabled• T: synchrocheck function enabled• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
BlkSynchBus1BlkSynchBus2BlkSynchLine2)
Binary inputs for interlocking the enabling signals at theoutput of the synchrocheck function.These would be typically controlled by fuse failure equipment(MCBs) monitoring the VT circuits.
• F: blocking input disabled• T: blocking input continuously enabled• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
OverridSync Binary input for bypassing the synchrocheck function.Thispermits an enabling signal (PermitToClose) regardless ofwhether the synchronism conditions are fulfilled or not. Itoverrides the function’s blocking and other enabling inputs.
• F: input not used• T: SC enabling output (PermitToClose) continuously
active• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
OpModeInp1OpModeInp23)
Binary inputs for remotely selecting the operating mode:
• F: input disabled• T: input continuously enabled• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
PermitToClose Signal indicating that the synchrocheck function is enablingclosure of the circuit-breaker.It is generated at the end of the measuring period(supervisTime) and remains active for as long as thesynchronism conditions are fulfilled, or until a blocking signalis received, or the synchrocheck function resets.
Start Signal generated at the instant the conditions forsynchronism are fulfilled for the first time.
SyncBlockd Signal indicating that the synchrocheck function is disabled,that is, both the inputs synchEnable1 and synchEnable2 areset to FALSE (F), and that the synchrocheck algorithm hasbeen discontinued.
TrigBlockd The CB close enabling inputs are blocked (one or moreblocking I/Ps are at logical 1), but the synchrocheckalgorithm continues to run.
SyncOverrid Signal indicating that the synchrocheck function is bypassedand a CB close enabling signal is being generated(PermitToClose) regardless of whether the synchronismconditions are fulfilled or not.
AmplDifOK Signal indicating that the voltage difference |dU| betweenthe phases used for checking synchronism has fallen belowthe value of the parameter maxVoltDif.
PhaseDifOK Signal indicating that the phase-shift |dPh| between thephases used for checking synchronism has fallen below thevalue of the setting of maxPhaseDif.
Table continues on next page
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 119Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Signal Description
FreqDifOK Signal indicating that the difference of frequency |df|between the phases used for checking synchronism hasfallen below the value of the setting of maxFreqDif.
LiveBus Signal indicating that the busbar is energized. (U >minVoltage)
DeadBus Signal indicating that the busbar is de-energized. (U <‘maxVoltage’)
LiveLine Signal indicating that the line is energized. (U > minVoltage)
DeadLine Signal indicating that the line is de-energized. (U <maxVoltage)
1) See Table 82.2) Parts of the function effected by the blocking inputs:
Assuming that both busbar input channels have been configured (double busbars), the active blocking inputdepends on the statuses of the binary inputs uBus1Activ and uBus2Activ:See Table 83.Assuming that only the first busbar input channel has been configured —BlckTrigBus1 and BlckTrigLine areactive.The active blocking inputs are connected internally to an OR gate and the CB close enabling outputs areblocked, if one of them is set to TRUE (T).
3) See Table 84.
Table 82: uBus1Activ, uBus2Activ
uBus1Activ uBus2Activ Selected voltage input
(T) TRUE (F) FALSE uBusInput1 active
(F) FALSE (T) TRUE uBusInput2 active
Other conditions The previous blocking input remains active.
Table 83: BlkSynchBus1, BlkSynchBus2, BlkSynchLine
uBus1Activ uBus2Activ Selected voltage input
(T) TRUE (F) FALSE BlckTrigBus1 and BlckTrigLine
(F) FALSE (T) TRUE BlckTrigBus2 and BlckTrigLine
Other conditions The previous blocking input remains active.
Table 84: OpModeInp1, OpModeInp2
OpModeInp1 OpModeInp2 Operating-Mode
(F) FALSE (F) FALSE Mode specified in the control program (Operat.-Mode)
(F) FALSE (T) TRUE Synchrocheck OR (bus dead AND line live)
(T) TRUE (F) FALSE Synchrocheck OR (bus live AND line dead)
(T) TRUE (T) TRUE Synchrocheck OR (bus dead AND line live) OR (bus liveAND line dead)
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
120 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.7.6 Configuration
5.7.6.1 GeneralGUID-F67E0F03-7DED-47F7-AF69-50DD405DD480 v1
It is only permissible to connect two energized parts of a power system, if the differencebetween the amplitudes of their voltages and the phase-shift between them are withinacceptable limits.
The purpose of the synchrocheck function is to determine these parameters and decidewhether it is permissible to connect the systems in parallel.
The function thus issues an enable signal (PermitToClose), providing the voltages of the twosystems are higher than the set minimum voltage (minVoltage) and
• the difference between the voltage amplitudes |dU|• the phase-shift |dPh|• the difference between the frequencies |df|
do not exceed the limits set for the parameters maxVoltDif, maxPhaseDif and maxFreqDif forthe adjustable time supervisTime.
According to the operating mode (Operat.-Mode) selected, the function also permits de-energized parts of a power system to be coupled.
Provision is also made for switching between voltage inputs belonging to the busbars of adouble busbar station by appropriately controlling two binary inputs (uBus1Activ anduBus2Activ).
Note that the function can only check the synchronism of two voltages at any one time, that ofone of the busbars and that of the line.
The synchrocheck function is therefore used mainly:
• to connect infeeds in parallel and to connect outgoing feeders to the system• to interconnect two synchronous or asynchronous parts of a power system• in autoreclosure schemes• as a safety check when carrying out manual switching operations.
Application example: Feeder connected to double busbars
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 121Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
18000045-IEC19000450-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000450 V1 EN-US
Figure 46: Principle of synchrocheck scheme
Figure 5.7.6.1 shows the principle of the synchrocheck scheme for determining the instantwhen it is permissible to connect a feeder to the power system. The voltages of busbar SS2and the line are monitored.
Where:
SS1, SS2: busbar 1, busbar 2
VT SS1, VT SS2, VT Line: VTs on busbar 1, busbar 2 and line
T1, T2: Isolators on busbars 1 and 2
CB: Circuit-breaker
uBusInput1, uBusInput2: Voltage input channels on the busbar side
uLineInput: Voltage input channel on the line side
BlckTrigBus1, BlckTrigBus2: Inputs for blocking the synchro-BlSyncLine check function by the VT fusefailure equipment
uBus1Activ, uBus2Activ: Binary inputs for switching between the analogue busbar voltage inputs inaccordance with the configuration of the isolators (mimic busbar)
5.7.6.2 Parameters to be setGUID-658DA938-FF60-44EA-BB99-96C62BC6136C v1
Max. voltage difference |dU| maxVoltDif
Max. phase-shift |dPh| maxPhaseDif
Max. frequency difference |df| maxFreqDif
Minimum voltage level for monitoring(determination of whether plant isenergized)
minVoltage
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
122 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Maximum voltage level for monitoring (determination of whether plant is de-energized)
maxVoltage
Choice of operating mode Operat.-Mode
Measuring period (delay before issuing enable) supervisTime
Reset delay t-Reset
Choice of phase for monitoring on the busbar side uBusInp-Ph
Choice of phase for monitoring on the line side uLineInp-Ph
Monitoring the conditions for synchronism (maxVoltDif, maxPhaseDifand maxFreqDif)
The determination of voltage difference, phase-shift and frequency difference is performedfor just one of the phases of the three-phase system. For this purpose, the analogue values arefirst filtered by a digital Fourier bandpass filter (to obtain the fundamentals) and then theorthogonal components UBus and ULine are derived.
The phase-shift dPh between the voltages and the difference between their amplitudes dU arecalculated from the corresponding vector diagram in the complex plane.
Synchrocheck function
Monitoring the conditions for synchronism:
18000046-IEC19000451-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000451 V1 EN-US
Figure 47: Monitoring the conditions for synchronism
where:
• UBus, ULine : complex vectors for UBus and ULine• ωB, ωL : angular velocities for U bus and U line• dU = U bus − U line• dPhi = PhiB − PhiL
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 123Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
The frequency difference df is obtained by determining the rate at which the phase-shiftbetween the voltage vectors varies:
d
df dPhi B Ldf
The conditions for synchronism are fulfilled, providing the values of the resulting variables arewithin the limits set for maxVoltDif, maxPhaseDif and maxFreqDif.
Typical values are:
• maxVoltDif: 0.2 UN• maxPhaseDif: 10°• maxFreqDif:
• 50 mHz for connecting largely synchronous parts of a stable closely meshed systemor where high demands with regard to synchronism have to be fulfilled.
• 100 mHz in autoreclosure schemes with long dead times (for example, three-phaseslow reclosure) or for autoreclosure of short transmission lines
• 200 mHz in autoreclosure schemes with short dead times, but where high slipfrequencies are to be expected
The setting of the synchronism measuring period (supervisTime) must bechosen to correspond to the settings for the maximum phase-shift andmaximum frequency difference.
Monitoring the voltage in two power systems (minVoltage, maxVoltage)
The determination of voltage amplitude can be either based on monitoring a single phase orall three phases depending on how the particular AnalogAddr is configured. If the three phasesare included, then the highest voltage of the three is detected for the maximum limit,respectively the lowest of the three for the minimum limit.
In order to be able to monitor the voltages in a wide frequency range, instantaneous values aremeasured (instead of digitally filtered analogue voltages).
The voltage detectors may be used to determine whether a system is de-energized orenergized:
• A system is considered to be de-energized, if its voltage (highest of the three phases inthe case of three-phase measurement) falls below the setting of the parametermaxVoltage.
• A system is considered to be energized, if its voltage (lowest of the three phases in thecase of three-phase measurement) exceeds the setting of the parameter minVoltage.
• On no account will an enable signal permitting closure of the circuit-breaker be issued,should the voltage lie between the limits of maxVoltage and minVoltage.
Typical values are:
• minVoltage 0.70 UN• maxVoltage 0.30 UN
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
124 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Choosing the operating mode of the synchrocheck function (‘Operat.-Mode’)
Basically, an enable signal will always be issued, if the conditions for synchronism (dU, dPh anddf) are fulfilled for the prescribed period and both systems, that is, busbar and line, areenergized (voltage > minVoltage).
In cases where closure of the circuit-breaker should also be enabled when one system is de-energized (voltage < maxVoltage), for example, connection of a radial feeder, this can beachieved by appropriately setting the parameter Operat.-Mode:
Table 85: Setting of Operat.-Mode
Operat.-Mode Closure enabled when:
Only SyncChk Synchronism conditions fulfilled AND (busbar > minVoltage AND line >minVoltage)
BusD & LineL Only SyncChk OR (busbar < maxVoltage AND line > minVoltage)
BusL & LineD Only SyncChck OR (busbar > minVoltage AND line < maxVoltage)
BusD XOR LineD Only SyncChk OR (busbar < maxVoltage AND line > minVoltage) OR (busbar> minVoltage AND line < maxVoltage)
BusD & LineD Only SyncChk OR (busbar < maxVoltage AND line < maxVoltage)
BusD OR LineD Only SyncChk OR (busbar < maxVoltage OR line < maxVoltage)
BusD Only SyncChk OR busbar < maxVoltage)
LineD Only SyncChk OR line < maxVoltage)
Remote operating mode selection
Four of the five operating modes can be selected by external signals applied to two of thefunction’s binary inputs (OpModeInp1 and OpModeInp2).
Table 86: Operating modes selected by external signals
Binary input signals Operating-ModeOpModeInp1 OpModeInp2
(F) FALSE (F) FALSE Mode specified in the control program (Operat.-Mode)
(F) FALSE (T) TRUE Synchrocheck OR (bus dead AND line live)
(T) TRUE (F) FALSE Synchrocheck OR (bus live AND line dead)
(T) TRUE (T) TRUE Synchrocheck OR (bus dead AND line live) OR (bus liveAND line dead)
Choice of phase for the voltage inputs on the busbar and line sides(uBusInp-Ph, uLineInp-Ph)
The phase voltage (uBusInp-Ph, uLineInp-Ph) to be used for determining synchronism can beentered separately for busbar and line inputs (to facilitate individual adjustment of phase-angle and amplitude).
All single and three-phase voltages are available for line voltage setting (1ph L1L2, L2L3 or L3L1;1ph L1E, L2E or L3E; 3ph Y; 3ph Δ) and all single-phase voltages for bus voltage setting(1ph L1L2, L2L3 or L3L1; 1ph L1E, L2E or L3E), but the ones chosen must agree with the settingfor the corresponding input channels (see Section 5.7.4).
Where both busbar inputs are in use, the definition of the phase (‘uBusInp-Ph’) applies to bothbusbars.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 125Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Notes
• A phase-to-phase measurement is to be preferred for a single-phasevoltage measurement. If a single-phase input has to be chosen on bothsides, the same phase should be used wherever possible.
• If a three-phase Y-connection is selected, phase-to-phase voltages areformed internally. This reduces the harmonic content and enables thefunction to continue to be used in ungrounded systems, which arerequired to remain in service with a single ground fault.
• According to the setting for uBusInp-Ph and uLineInp-Ph, either one phaseor all three phases are monitored. Whether or not the conditions forsynchronism (dU, dPh and df) are fulfilled is determined on the basis of asingle phase, whereby the following conditions apply:
• Where three phases are monitored on busbar and line sides, thephase-to-phase potential UL1L2 is the one extracted for furtherprocessing.
• Should a three-phase measurement be defined on one side and asingle-phase on the other, then the single-phase voltage set for thesingle-phase input is used on both sides.
Measuring period (supervisTime), reset time (t-Reset), operating time ofthe function and dead time of any autoreclosure function
Measuring period (supervisTime):
This adjustable delay time, which is initiated at the end of the pick-up time, is the periodduring which all the conditions for synchronism must be continuously fulfilled to permitclosure of the circuit-breaker. The timer is reset should one of the parameters move out of thepermissible range.
Providing they all remain within their preset ranges, the enable signal (PermitToClose) isissued at the end of the measuring period.
Especially, in autoreclosure applications, it is of advantage to set the measuring period(supervisTime) in relation to the settings for Phase diff. and maxFreqDif. It also providesfacility for allowing for the operating time of the circuit-breaker.
2 (' PhaseDiff ')'supervisTime ' ( )
(' FreqDiff ') Hz 360s tv ts s
where:
• ts: circuit-breaker operating timeTypical range: 0 ... 100 ms
• tv: time required by the function to pick up(response by the function to transient phenomena in the input voltage and timertolerances):typically 60... 80 ms for values of supervisTime <200 mstypically 80... 100 ms for values of supervisTime ≥200 ms
The above setting for the measuring period ensures that for a constant frequency differencedf within the setting of maxFreqDif, the phase-shift dPh will still be inside the set permissibleangular range (- maxPhaseDif to + maxPhaseDif) at the end of the time supervisTime.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
126 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Typical values for a phase-shift setting (maxPhaseDif) of 10°:
maxFreqDif supervisTime
200 mHz 100... 200 ms
100 mHz 250... 450 ms
50 mHz 600...1000 ms
Minimum function operating time
The minimum operating time achieved by the function, that is, the shortest possible timebetween the instant the synchronism conditions are fulfilled for the first time and thegeneration of the signal enabling the circuit-breaker to be closed PermitToClose, is given bythe sum of the measuring time setting supervisTime and the pick-up response time tv of thefunction.
Minimum operating time = (supervisTime) + tv
Autoreclosure dead time
In an autoreclosure scheme, the dead time set for the autoreclosure function must be at leastas long as the minimum operating time of the synchrocheck function given above in order topermit the synchrocheck function to issue an enable signal (PermitToClose) within the deadtime:
Dead time ≥ minimum operating time = (supervisTime) + tv
Reset time (t-Reset)
From the instant that one or more of the synchronism conditions are no longer fulfilled, theenabling signal output (PermitToClose) and the pick-up signal reset after the time set fort‑Reset.
This ensures a CB closing signal can be maintained for a certain minimum time.
Typical value:
t-Reset 50 ms
Where high slip frequencies df are to be expected, t‑Reset must be shortenough to prevent the phase-shift from exceeding the set permissible range ofphase-angles (-PhaseDiff to + PhaseDiff) during the reset time.
5.7.6.3 Supplementary information for binary inputsGUID-622840DB-B163-4701-81B9-B8F3191E5563 v1
Inputs for switching between analogue busbar inputs (uBus1Activ,uBus2Activ)
Where the two busbar inputs (Bus I/P1 and Bus I/P2) have been configured for a double busbarinstallation, the measurement can be switched from one busbar to the other by signalscorresponding to the isolator positions applied to the inputs uBus1Activ and uBus2Activ:
uBus1Activ uBus2Activ Analogue inputs for synchronisatiom
(T) TRUE (F) FALSE uBusInput1 and uLineInput
(F) FALSE (T) TRUE uBusInput2 and uLineInput
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 127Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Other combinations of the states of these two inputs do not result in any switching of theAnalogAddr channels and the prevailing situation is maintained.
• The function (timer, all measuring elements and the associated outputs) isautomatically re-initialised when busbar inputs are switched. Thisprocedure takes about 60 ms (internal response times). The function thenbegins to evaluate the new busbar voltage and from this instant onwardsthe generation of an enable signal (PermitToClose) relating to the newsystem configuration is possible.
• The two binary inputs uBus1Activ and uBus2Activ shall be not used inconfigurations in which only one busbar input (uBusInput1) is defined.
Blocking inputs for preventing the synchrocheck function from issuing anenable signal (BlckTrigBus1, BlckTrigBus2, BlckTrigLine)
These are assigned to the corresponding voltage inputs and used mainly when the VT circuitcan be interrupted by fuse-failure equipment (miniature circuit-breakers). In such cases, theblocking inputs are connected to auxiliary contacts on the fuse-failure equipment. Thisprecaution eliminates any risk of the synchrocheck function permitting the closure of a circuit-breaker onto a line it considers to be de-energized, which in reality is under voltage.
Function of the blocking inputs:
• Both busbar voltage inputs have been configured:Which of the blocking inputs is enabled depends on which of the busbar inputsuBus1Activ and uBus2Activ is active, that is, on which voltage input is active:
uBus1Activ uBus2Activ Active blocking inputs
(T) TRUE (F) FALSE BlckSyncBus1 and BlckSyncLine
(F) FALSE (T) TRUE BlckSyncBus2 and BlckSyncLine
Other combinations of the states of these two inputs do not influence the blocking inputsand the prevailing situation is maintained.
• If only one busbar voltage input is configured, all the blocking I/Ps (BlkSyncBus1,BlkSyncBus2 and BlckTrigLine) are enabled regardless of the states of the binary I/PsuBus1Activ and uBus2Activ.
The active blocking inputs are connected to an OR function so that a logical 1 from any one ofthem causes all the measuring elements and the associated outputs (start, AmplDifOK,PhaseDifOK, FreqDifOK, LiveBus, LiveLine, DeadBus and DeadLine) and also the enablingoutput (PermitToClose) to reset. The algorithm of the synchrocheck function, however,continues to run.
Inputs for enabling the synchrocheck function (ReleaseInp1, ReleaseInp2)
Since the synchrocheck function is only required during the relevant switching operations andautoreclosure cycles, it may be blocked at all other times to save processor time. The binaryinputs ReleaseInp1 and ReleaseInp2 are used for this purpose. Internally they are the inputs ofan OR gate, so that at least one must be active before the synchrocheck program will run.
If neither of the two enabling signals is at logical 1, processing of the algorithm ceases. All thefunction’s measuring element outputs also reset immediately and any circuit-breaker closeenabling signal (PermitToClose) resets after the time set for t‑Reset.
Conditional enabling of the synchrocheck function is especially recommended, where it has tooperate in conjunction with other functions in the same unit such as distance protection,
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
128 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
which are critical from the operating time point of view, so as not to adversely influence theirtripping times.
Application example
The scheme below shows a synchrocheck function in the same unit as the distance protectionand autoreclosure functions. The synchrocheck function is only required during the dead timesof the autoreclosure function. This is achieved by connecting the inverted output signalAR ready generated by the autoreclosure function to the binary I/P ReleaseInp1 (orReleaseInp2) of the synchrocheck unit.
Synchro-
check
Distance
function Auto-
reclosure
function
Start
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
SynchroChck
Binary
circle
Close CB
AR ready
ReleasInp1
18000047-IEC19000452-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000452 V1 EN-US
Figure 48: Block diagram showing the interconnections between the functions for ascheme with conditional enabling of the synchrocheck function
Input for bypassing the synchrocheck function (OverridSync)
A signal applied to this binary input causes a PermitToClose signal to be generatedimmediately regardless of whether the conditions for synchronism are fulfilled or not.
This input overrides all other blocking or enabling inputs.
5.8 Autoreclosure 79 (AR)GUID-C9F0769D-51E8-4D70-857D-019C7F3C578F v1
5.8.1 Mode of operationGUID-866541F5-4D5B-4E45-8A2C-468F6825B5E4 v1
The function can be configured for single or three-phase auto-reclosure.
The unit can operate in conjunction with either of the two protection functions (distance andovercurrent protection) and either an internal or external synchrocheck function.
5.8.2 FeaturesGUID-CE6ACA20-0BA0-4B60-B22E-F9FD9AB495F9 v1
• Up to 4 fast or slow reclosure attempts• First cycle with up to 4 individually configurable single and/or three-phase reclosure
attempts• Independent operating indicators for each reclosure cycle• Wide dead time setting range• Provision to control bypassing of the synchrocheck unit and extending the dead time for
the first zone by external signals• Clearly defined response to changing fault conditions during the dead time (evolving
faults)
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 129Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.8.3 Inputs and outputs
5.8.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-8E6CA574-82C1-4527-8C65-CFEF76D88382 v1
• None
5.8.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-1D0928D6-6742-473B-83D8-FF23EC79F524 v1
Start (Start)
Redundant start (Start 2) *)
Redundant start (Start 3) *)
Three-phase trip (Trip CB 3P)
Redundant three-phase trip (Trip CB2 3P) *)
Redundant three-phase trip (Trip CB3 3P) *)
General trip (Trip CB)
Redundant general trip (Trip CB2) *)
Redundant general trip (Trip CB3) *)
CB ready for open/close/open cycle (CB ready)
CB2 ready for open/close/open cycle (CB2 ready) **)
CB ready for close/open cycle (CO Ready)
CB2 ready for close/open cycle (CO Ready 2) **)
CB open (CB open)
CB2 open (CB2 open **)
CB2 preferred circuit-breaker (CB2 Priority) **)
Synchrocheck (SynchroChck)
Synchrocheck 2 (SynchroChck2) **)
Dead line (Dead Line)
Dead line 2 (Dead Line2) **)
External blocking input (ExtBlkAR)
Conditional blocking input (CondBlkAR)
Manual close blocking input (Manual Close)
External synchrocheck bypass (Ext.SCBypas)
External extension of dead time (Extend t1)
Delay from master CB (MasterDel)
Block from master CB (MasterUnsucc)
Block reclosure by follower (redundant scheme) (Inhibit Inp)
External 1P-1P selector for 1st. AR (MD1_EXT_1P_1P)
External 1P-3P selector for 1st. AR (MD1_EXT_1P_3P)
External 1P3P-3P selector for 1st. AR (MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P)
Ext. 1P3P-1P3P select. for 1st. AR (MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P)
Remark:*) 2 and 3 denote the inputs of protection functions 2 and 3 or relays 2 and 3 in a redundant protectionscheme.**) 2 denotes the inputs for CB2 in a duplex scheme.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
130 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.8.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-A8B580BC-1416-4340-8E66-5E91C43D1665 v1
CB close signal (Close CB)
CB2 close signal (Close CB2) **)
Overreach switching signal (ZExtension)
Definitive trip (Def. Trip)
Prepare trip of all three phases (Trip 3-Pol)
Block Follower CB (BlkFlwr)
Delay Follower CB (DelFlwr)
Block for Follower recloser (Inhibit Outp)
Reclosure function ready (AR Ready)
Reclosure function blocked (AR Blocked)
Reclosure cycle running (AR in prog.)
1st single-phase reclosure in progress (First AR 1P)
1st three-phase reclosure in progress (First AR 3P)
2nd Reclosure in progress (Second AR)
3rd reclosure in progress (Third AR)
4th reclosure in progress (Fourth AR)
Remark:**) 2 denotes the inputs for CB2 in a duplex scheme.
5.8.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-FC4B02BD-9787-4B7B-870B-725CAE54A890 v1
• None
5.8.4 Function settingsGUID-EFD006C2-2320-4D06-BF6F-D1EF2609EFFE v1
Table 87: Autoreclosure function - settings
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select)
1. AR Mode 1P3P-1P3P (Select)
2..4. AR Mode off (Select)
t Dead1 1P s 001.20 0.05 300 0.01
t Dead1 3P s 000.60 0.05 300 0.01
t Dead1 Ext. s 001.00 0.05 300 0.01
t Dead2 s 001.20 0.05 300 0.01
t Dead3 s 005.00 0.05 300 0.01
t Dead4 s 060.00 0.05 300 0.01
t Oper s 000.50 0.05 300 0.01
t Inhibit s 005.00 0.05 300 0.01
t Close s 000.25 0.05 300 0.01
t Discrim.1P s 000.60 0.10 300 0.01
t Discrim.3P s 000.30 0.10 300 0.01
t Timeout s 001.00 0.05 300 0.01
Table continues on next page
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 131Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
t AR Block s 005.00 0.05 300 0.01
Start BinaryAddr Always off
Trip CB 3P BinaryAddr Always off
Trip CB BinaryAddr Always off
Start 2 BinaryAddr Always off
Trip CB2 3P BinaryAddr Always off
Trip CB2 BinaryAddr Always off
Start 3 BinaryAddr Always off
Trip CB3 3P BinaryAddr Always off
Trip CB3 BinaryAddr Always off
CB Ready BinaryAddr Always off
CO Ready BinaryAddr Always off
CB Open BinaryAddr Always off
Dead line BinaryAddr Always off
Ext. Blk AR BinaryAddr Always off
Cond.Blk AR BinaryAddr Always off
Manual Close BinaryAddr Always off
Inhibit Inp. BinaryAddr Always off
Extend t1 BinaryAddr Always off
MD1 EXT 1P 1P BinaryAddr Always off
MD1 EXT 1P 3P BinaryAddr Always off
MD1 EXT 1P3P3P
BinaryAddr Always off
MD1 EXT 1P3P1P3P
BinaryAddr Always off
Close CB SignalAddr
Trip 3-Pol SignalAddr
Def. Trip SignalAddr
AR Ready SignalAddr
AR in Prog. SignalAddr
AR Blocked SignalAddr
First AR 3P SignalAddr
First AR 1P SignalAddr
Second AR SignalAddr
Third AR SignalAddr
Fourth AR SignalAddr
Inhibit Outp SignalAddr
SCBypas 1P off (Select)
SCBypas 1P3P off (Select)
Ext.SCBypas BinaryAddr off (F)
SynchroChck BinaryAddr off (F)
ZE Prefault on (Select)
ZE 1. AR off (Select)
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
132 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
ZE 2. AR off (Select)
ZE 3. AR off (Select)
ZE 4. AR off (Select)
ZExtension SignalAddr
Master mode off (Select)
MasterDelay BinaryAddr Always off
Mast.noSucc BinaryAddr Always off
DelayFlwr. SignalAddr
Blk.toFlwr. SignalAddr
CB2 Ready BinaryAddr Always off
CO Ready 2 BinaryAddr Always off
CB2 open BinaryAddr Always off
SynchroChck2 BinaryAddr Always off
Dead line 2 BinaryAddr Always off
Close CB2 SignalAddr
CB2 Priority BinaryAddr Always off
5.8.5 ParametersGUID-4AC6C85E-84E0-452F-99FF-1267506E048E v1
Table 88: Autoreclosure function - parameters
Signal Description
ParSet 4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function is active.
1. AR Mode • 1. 1P-1P —single-phase trip and reclosure for ground faults (single-phase deadtime), no reclosure for phase faults
• 1. 1P-3P —single-phase trip followed by three phase trip after approx. 20 ms,three-phase reclosure for ground faults (three-phase dead time initiated bysingle-phase trip), no reclosure for phase faults
• 1. 1P3P-3P —three-phase trip and reclosure for earth and phase faults(three-phase dead time)
• 1. 1P3P-1P3P —single-phase trip and reclosure for ground faults (single-phasedead time), three-phase trip and reclosure for phase faults (three-phase deadtime)
• Ext. Wahl —External selection by the binary inputsMD1_EXT_1P_1P, MD1_EXT_1P_3P, MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P and MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P
2…4AR Mode Maximum number of reclosure attempts (all three-phase)
• off —no 2nd, 3rd or 4th reclosure• 2 AR —2 reclosures• 3 AR —3 reclosures• 4 AR —4 reclosures
t Dead1 1P Dead time for first single-phase reclosure
t Dead1 3P Dead time for first three-phase reclosure
t Dead1 Ext. Extension of 1st dead time for single or three-phase reclosure Effective as long as alogical 1 (pulse or continuous) is applied to the Extend t1 I/P before the dead timefinishes (falling edge).
t Dead2 2nd dead time
t Dead3 3rd dead time
t Dead4 4th dead time
Table continues on next page
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 133Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Signal Description
t Oper Maximum duration of a fault for AR
t Inhibit Period (CB recovery time) from the falling edge of the last reclosure attempt duringwhich the autoreclosure function is blocked and after which the function is reset.In the event of an evolving fault between discrimination and dead times, the periodcommences at the instant of another trip occurring between the two times.The inhibit timer is also started if the protection trips after the fault duration timet Oper has elapsed.
t Close Duration of CB close signal
t Discrim.1P Evolving fault discrimination time for single-phase reclosure
t Discrim.3P Evolving fault discrimination time for three-phase reclosure
t Timeout Period following the dead time during which the CB close signal has to occur. If itdoes not, the Def. Trip signal is generated.
t AR Block Time during which reclosure is blocked. t AR Block is started by every blockingsignal (Ext.Blk AR, Cond.Blk. AR, Manual Close, Inhibit Inp and MasternoSucc).
Start1)
Input for signaling the start of a reclosure cycle. This I/P is connected to the Generalstart signal of a protection function.
Trip CB 3P
Input for the three-phase trip signal. The three-phase trip from a protectionfunction is connected to this input.
Trip CB I/P for the general trip signal. The general trip from a protection function isconnected to this input.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Start 2 Input for the AR start signal.In redundant protection schemes, the general start signal from the 2nd protectionis connected to this input.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Trip CB2 3P Input for the three-phase trip signal.In redundant protection schemes, the general tripping signal from the 2ndprotection is connected to this input.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Trip CB2 Input for the general trip signal.In redundant protection schemes, the general trip signal from the 2nd protection isconnected to this input.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Start 3 Input for the AR start signal.The general start signal from the 3rd protection can be connected to this input.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Trip CB3 3P Input for the three-phase trip signal.The three-phase tripping signal from the 3rd protection can be connected to thisinput.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Trip CB3 Input for the general trip signal.The general trip signal from the 3rd protection can be connected to this input.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
CB Ready Input excited by a signal from the CB when it is ready (open/close/open).Set to on (T or True), if not needed or not fitted.Input logic: CB ready OR CB2 readyIn a duplex scheme, either an active CB ready or CB2 ready I/P enables anautoreclosure cycle.Resetting of this input is delayed internally by 100 ms.
CO Ready Input excited by a signal from the CB when it is ready for a close/open cycle.Set to on (T or True) if not needed, not fitted and Dead line or ExtSCBypas not used.Input logic for enabling the closing command: [(synchrocheck AND CO Ready) ORDead line OR ExtSCBypas].
CB Open Input excited by a signal from the CB when it is open.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.To avoid the operation of fast circuit-breakers from being blocked unintentionally,the effect of this input is delayed internally by 100 ms.
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
134 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Signal Description
Dead line Input indicating that the line is de-energized (CB open input if the VTs are on thebusbar side).Set to off (F or False), if not needed.An active input overrides the following logical relationship of the inputs:synchrocheck AND CO Ready.
Ext. Blk AR Input for blocking the internal autoreclosure function.Even an autoreclosure cycle that is in progress is immediately blocked by a signalapplied to this input.The output signals Trip 3 Pol and Def Trip are generated and a three-phasedefinitive trip takes place.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Cond. Blk. AR Input for a conditional blocking signal.Blocking only when AR cycle is not in progress.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.When tripping is by the distance protection SOTF logic or a directional ground faultPLC signal, the corresponding signals can be connected to this input to preventautoreclosure.
Manual Close Blocking input excited by the manual CB close signal.Even an autoreclosure cyclethat is in progress is immediately blocked by a signal applied to this input.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Inhibit Inp. Input for blocking the follower reclosure function in a redundant scheme. Thefollower is blocked from the end of the master closing signal until the end of thereclaim time.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Extend t1 Input for conditionally extending the dead time (single and three-phase) for the first(fast) reclosure.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
MD1_EXT_1P_1PMD1_EXT_1P_3PMD1_EXT_1P3P_3PMD1_EXT_1P3P_1P3P
Inputs for externally selecting the mode for the first reclosure. They are onlyeffective when the parameter 1. AR Mode is set to Ext. select.Unused inputs must be set to off (F or False). If a signal is applied to more than oneinput, the next mode in the list is the one that is active. The autoreclosure functionis blocked if none of the inputs is used.
Close CB CB close signal
Trip 3-Pol Signal to the distance function so that it can only carry out a three-phase trip.This signal is inverted and connected to the distance protection I/P 1P AR. Thissignal is active in many situations, but particularly when the AR function is blocked,the CB is not ready for AR, the CB is open, the single-phase discrimination time t 1PDiscrim finishes or the output signal First AR 3P is active.It resets at the end of reclaim time.
Def. Trip Signal initiating definitive tripping of the CB.This signal is normally active when the protection trips again after the lastprogrammed reclosing shot or trips while the AR function is blocked. The signalresets after a fixed time of 500 ms.
AR Ready Signal AR function ready for a reclosure cycle. This signal is active when the ARfunction is ON and standing by and also during the closing command.
AR in Prog. Signal indicating that a reclosure cycle is in progress.This signal is active from the beginning of the dead time until the end of the lastreclosure attempt.
AR Blocked Signal indicating that the autoreclosure relay is blocked.
First AR 3P Signal 1st three-phase reclosure attempt in progress.
First AR 1P Signal 1st single-phase reclosure attempt in progress.
Second AR Signal 2nd reclosure attempt in progress (three-phase).
Third AR Signal 3rd reclosure attempt in progress (three-phase).
Fourth AR Signal 4th reclosure attempt in progress (three-phase).
Inhibit Outp Signal for blocking the follower AR function in a redundant scheme.This signal is active from the end of the master AR close command to the end of thereclaim time.
Table continues on next page
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 135Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Signal Description
SCBypas 1P Bypass of the synchrocheck and close/open ready signals for the first single-phasereclosure:
• on —First single-phase reclosure not enabled by synchrocheck and close/openready signals (bypass always active).
• off —First single-phase reclosure enabled by the synchrocheck and close/openready signals(bypass inactive).
SCBypas1P3P Bypass of the synchrocheck and close/open ready signals for the first single orthree-phase reclosure:
• on —First reclosure not enabled by synchrocheck and close/open ready signals(bypass always active).
• off —First reclosure enabled by synchrocheck and close/open ready signals(bypass inactive).
Ext.SCBypas Bypasses the synchroChck and CO Ready signals. Set to off (F or False), if notneeded.Input logic for enabling the close command: [(synchrocheck AND CO Ready) ORDead line OR Ext.SCBypas].Input logic for enabling the close command: [(synchroChk2 AND CO Ready 2) ORDead line OR Ext.SCBypas].
SynchroChck Input for a signal from a synchrocheck relay.Set to on (T or True), if not needed, not fitted and Dead line or ExtSCBypas not used.Input logic: [(Synchrocheck AND CO Ready) OR Dead line OR Ext.SCBypas].
ZE Prefault Distance relay reach setting before the first fault:
• on —overreaching (ZExtension signal active)• off —underreaching (ZExtension signal inactive)
ZE 1. AR Distance relay reach after the first reclosure attempt:
• on —overreaching (ZExtension signal active)• off —underreaching (ZExtension signal inactive)
ZE 2. AR Distance relay reach after the second reclosure attempt:
• on —overreaching (ZExtension signal active)• off —underreaching (ZExtension signal inactive)
ZE 3. AR Distance relay reach after the third reclosure attempt:
• on —overreaching (ZExtension signal active)• off —underreaching (ZExtension signal inactive)
ZE 4. AR Distance relay reach after the fourth reclosure attempt:
• on —overreaching (ZExtension signal active)• off —underreaching (ZExtension signal inactive)
ZExtension Signal to the distance function to switch it to overreach or enable an overcurrentfunction with a short delay.
Master Mode (For 1½ breaker and redundant schemes.)Selection of an autoreclosure function to be Master:
• on —Master output signals transmitted• off —Master outputs blocked
MasterDelay Input for a signal delaying the closing command from the follower reclosurefunction.This signal picks up when the dead time of the master reclosure function starts andis reset either by a new trip after the last reclosure of the cycle or at the end of thewait time following successful reclosure by the master.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
Table continues on next page
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
136 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Signal Description
Mast.noSucc Input for a blocking signal from the master CB.This signal is triggered by the rising edge of the Def.Trip output from the masterreclosure function and resets after a fixed time of 500 ms.Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
DelayFlwr. Signal to delay the follower CB for as long as the master circuit-breaker has notcompleted its autoreclosure cycle.The signal picks up at the start of master AR dead time and is reset either by therising edge of the Def.Trip output or the falling edge of the Close CB output afterthe time tClose.
Blk.toFlwr Signal to block the follower CB as long as reclosure of the master CB isunsuccessful.The excursion of this signal is the same as for the Def Trip output.
CB2 Ready Input excited by a signal from CB2 when it is ready (open/close/open).Set to off (F or False), if not needed or not fitted.Input logic: CB ready OR CB2 readyIn a duplex scheme, the autoreclosure cycle is enabled either by an active CB readyor CB2 ready input.Resetting of this input is delayed internally by 100 ms.
CO Ready 2 Input excited by a signal from CB2 when it is ready for a close/open operation.Set to on (T or True), if not needed, not fitted and Dead line 2 is not used.Input logic for enabling the close command: [(synchrocheck2 AND CO Ready 2) ORDead line 2 OR ExtSCBypas].
CB2 open I/P excited by a signal from CB2 when it is open.Set to on (T or True), if not needed. Observe the information given for the duplexlogic in a duplex scheme.
SynchroChck2 Input for a signal from a synchrocheck function belonging to CB2.Set to on (T or True), if not needed, not fitted and Dead line 2 or ExtSCBypas notused.Input logic for enabling the close command: [(synchrocheck2 AND CO Ready 2) ORDead line 2 OR ExtSCBypas].
Dead line 2 Input indicating that line 2 is de-energized (CB2 open and VTs 2 on the busbar side).Set to off (F or False), if not needed.An active input overrides the following logical relationship of the inputs:synchrocheck 2 AND CO Ready 2.
Close CB2 Close CB2 signal (duplex)
CB2 Priority Input for determining the preferred circuit-breaker:off (F or False) CB1 is preferred circuit-breakeron (T or True) CB2 is preferred circuit-breakerIf both circuit-breakers are closed before a fault, only the preferred circuit-breakerperforms the entire autoreclosure cycle. The other circuit-breaker closes either aftersuccessful autoreclosure or when the close command to the preferred circuit-breaker is not enabled (missing CO Ready or Synchrocheck).
1) For the autoreclosure function to operate correctly, at least the Start and Trip CB 3P inputs must beconnected to a protection function or via a binary I/P to an external protection relay.
5.8.6 Configuration
5.8.6.1 GeneralGUID-DFA37C03-18E1-4EE9-9F28-FBA0371C66FB v1
The autoreclosure function can perform from 1 to 4 autoreclosure attempts. The first attemptcan be either single or three-phase while the subsequent attempts are always three-phase. Thetype and number are determined by the parameters 1. AR Mode (4 different modes for the 1streclosure cycle) and 2..4 AR Mode.
The function can operate in conjunction with either an external distance protection relay orother internal protection functions.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 137Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
It can also operate in a scheme comprising two or more protection functions.
5.8.6.2 Connections between autoreclosure and distance functionsGUID-6A5B98BA-F1BC-4111-847E-73E435ADDECC v1
The autoreclosure function determines from the states of the input signals start, Trip CB andTrip CB 3P, whether the distance protection has picked up and whether it has performed asingle or a three-phase trip. Only the Trip CB signal is generated for a single-phase trip,whereas both the Trip CB and Trip CB 3P signals are generated for a three-phase trip.
The external distance relay or internal distance function decides whether single or three-phasetripping should take place.
The autoreclosure function can send two signals to the distance protection. The Trip 3-Polsignal informs the distance protection whether it should perform a single or a three-phasetrip. The ZExtension signal switches the distance protection’s over-reaching zone on and off.
Where the SOTF logic is not required to operate during autoreclosure, connect the AR in prog.signal to the ExtBlkSOTF binary input of the distance function. The SOTF 10 s timer in thedistance function’s SOTF logic is normally activated for dead times <10 s and in this case theabove connection is not necessary.
If the SOTF logic initiates tripping, an autoreclosure cycle can be inhibited by connecting thestart SOTF from the distance function to the CondBlkAR input of the autoreclosure function.
18000048-IEC19000453-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000453 V1 EN-US
Figure 49: Distance and autoreclosure functions in the same unit
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
138 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
18000049-IEC19000454-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000454 V1 EN-US
Figure 50: Distance protection and autoreclosure functions in different units
5.8.6.3 Connections between autoreclosure and overcurrent functionsGUID-A6CF8718-6382-4229-8E4E-88F3788A1298 v1
To prevent the discrimination timer from operating, connect the overcurrent Trip signal to thetwo inputs Start and Trip CB 3P of the autoreclosure function.
The time t Close must be set longer than the maximum operating time of the activated(graded) overcurrent functions:
tClose from AR function > tmax. overcurrent time delay
In cases where the zone extension signal is used in conjunction with overcurrent functions, theterms ‘overreach’ and ‘underreach’ have the following meanings:
• overreach: enabling of an overcurrent function having a short (non-graded) time delay.• underreach: enabling of an overcurrent function having a long (graded) time delay.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 139Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
AR
Trip CB 3P
ZExtension
CB
ope
n
CB
Man
ua
l C
lose
C
O r
ea
dy
Clo
se C
B
REB500sys
OR
(Logic) O/C
O/C
Block
Trip
Trip
I1>, t1
I2>, t2
Start
18000050-IEC19000455-1-en.vsdx
IEC19000455 V1 EN-US
Figure 51: Overcurrent and autoreclosure functions in the same unit
where:
• t1 standard delay (0.5 ... 1.5 s)• t2 short delay (0.02 ... 0.2 s)• I1>, I2> pick-up value I set for Trip
5.8.6.4 Coordinating autoreclosure (AR) with first and second main protectionsGUID-6063E9EF-3D99-4AC7-A11C-4786D0A12FE7 v1
Provision is made for coordinating the operation of the autoreclosure function of mainprotection 1 with main protection 2.
To avoid any risk of mal-operation due to differing timer tolerances, precautions are necessaryto ensure that only one autoreclosure function is active per line terminal at any one time.
Main protection 1 (external device) and main protection 2 (REB500sys) are completelyindependent protection systems and if each has its own autoreclosure function (Figure 49),their operation has to be coordinated. As long as the AR function for main protection 1 is inoperation, that of main protection 2 is blocked. To this end, main protection 1 output COReady is connected to input 118205_Ext. Blk AR on the REB500sys bay unit. The startingsignals (Start L1L2L3) and tripping signals (Trip CB and Trip CB 3P) generated by theREB500sys distance function UZ(2) are connected to their own autoreclosure function AR(2)and to the autoreclosure function AR(1). The corresponding signals from the external distanceprotection UZ(1) are only connected to the external autoreclosure device AR(1). On the otherhand, the signal from AR(1) instructing the distance protection only to perform a three-phasetrip (Trip CB 3P) goes to both distance protection functions UZ(1) and UZ(2). The same signalfrom AR(2) only goes to distance protection UZ(2).
The autoreclosure unit AR(1) and the two distance protection functions UZ(1) and UZ(2) areactive in normal operation. An autoreclosure cycle can be initiated by either UZ(1) or UZ(2) asboth communicate with the autoreclosure device AR(1).
Whenever autoreclosure device AR(1) is in the not-ready state, autoreclosure device AR(2) isactivated and communicates with distance protection function UZ(2). AR(1) is generally fittedin the same bay unit as distance protection UZ(1) and a not ready status applies to bothfunctions. This means that distance protection and autoreclosure of the line are performed bymain protection 2 (REB500sys).
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
140 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
The Manual Master Mode is only useful for three-phase AR. For a single-phasetrip, a complex Fupla is required, which is not available in REB500.
18000051-IEC19000456-1-en.vsdx
UZ(2) Start RST
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
1PolAR
ZExtension
AR(2) Start
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Trip 3-Pol
ZExtension
CB
open
CB
Manual C
lose
CO
Ready
Clo
se C
B
REB500sys
y
UZ(1)
Start RST
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
1PolAR
ZExtensionAR
AR(1)
Start
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Trip 3-Pol
ZExtension
CB
open
CB
Manual C
lose
CO
Ready
Clo
se C
B
Ext.
Blk
. A
R
AR
Read
y
> = 1
> = 1
> = 1
> = 1
IEC19000456 V1 EN-US
Figure 52: Coordinating autoreclosure of main protection 1 with main protection 2
5.8.6.5 TimersGUID-6CEC8BC6-7684-4944-B5AB-AF62A7DDC672 v1
The timers have setting ranges extending up to 300 s in steps of 10 ms.
The purpose of each of the timers is described below.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 141Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Dead times (t Dead1 1P to t Dead 4)
Provided the trip signal is issued before t Oper elapses, the dead time is the period betweenthe tripping signal (Trip CB) and the close signal (Close CB).
The required dead time must be entered separately for each reclosure cycle. This necessitatessetting the following parameters: t Dead1 1P, t Dead1 3P, t Dead 2, t Dead 3 and t Dead 4.
Provision is made for externally switching the dead times t Dead1 1P and t Dead1 3P for thefirst (fast) reclosure attempt to a second setting. The corresponding additional time periodcan be set with the aid of the parameter t Dead 1 Ext and activated via the binary I/P Extendt1.
The second, third and fourth reclosure attempts are always three-phase.
Extended dead time (t Dead 1 Ext)
This time provides facility for extending the dead time (for example, should thecommunications channel be defective or for a redundant scheme with two autoreclosurefunctions). The extended dead time is enabled by the binary input Extend t1.
Maximum fault duration for a reclosure attempt (t Oper)
If a fault has persisted for some time, the probability of a successful reclosure reduces. Thelikelihood of the power system becoming unstable is also greater for an unsuccessfulautoreclosure attempt following a fault which has persisted for a long period. It is for thesereasons that the time after the inception of a fault during which reclosure can be initiated islimited. The fault duration is set using parameter t Oper.
The timer for the fault duration is started by the pick-up signal from the protection function(Start). Faults resulting in tripping after t Oper are locked out (Def. Trip) and reclosure doesnot take place.
Should the fault duration time expire before the protection trips, autoreclosure is blocked andthe reclaim time is started.
Example:
Time T Oper < Delay(2) of the distance function means that autoreclosure only takes place forfaults in the first distance zone (Delay(1)).
This function is not required for schemes that only use current functions. The binary inputsStart and Trip CB 3P are connected together (see Section 5.8.6.3).
Reclaim time (t inhibit)
One purpose of the inhibit time is to permit the circuit-breaker to recover its full voltagewithstand. To this end, it disables the autoreclosure function for the time set for parameter tinhibit after one of the following events:
• the last reclosing attempt• a definitive trip resulting from a protection trip after the fault duration time t Oper• a recurring trip between discrimination time and dead time (evolving fault, see output
signal Def. Trip).
Close signal duration (t Close)
The maximum duration of the circuit-breaker close signal (command output Close CB) isdetermined by the parameter t Close. Any tripping signal which occurs during this timeoverrides the close signal. A second, third or fourth reclosure attempt can only take place, ifthe next trip occurs within the time t Close.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
142 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Discrimination times (t 1P discrim. and t 3P discrim.)
The discrimination time determines the procedure in the event of a different kind of faultoccurring during the dead time (evolving fault), that is, one of the other two phases also picksup or the tripping signal resets and picks up again. The discrimination time is started togetherwith the dead time. Should a tripping signal recur due to an evolving fault between the expiryof the discrimination time and before the end of the dead time, the reclaim timer is startedand a definitive trip (Def. Trip) initiated. The dead time is also discontinued and the signal ARin prog. reset.
If the first fault was initially an earth fault and evolves during the time t Dead1 1P, but beforethe end of the discrimination time t Discrim 1P, the dead time t Dead1 3P is started and three-phase reclosure takes place.
The discrimination time t Discrim 3P is also needed for 2 or 1½ breaker schemes, where eachcircuit-breaker has its own autoreclosure function.
A typical setting for the parameters t Discrim 1P or t Discrim 3P for single- and three-phasereclosure is 50% of the shortest dead time.
The minimum permissible setting for the discrimination time is:
100 ms + CB time
The time t1EvolFaults during which a subsequent fault has to be detected(evolving or unsuccessful reclosure) is a distance function setting.
The distance protection parameter t1EvolFaults enables the time to be set during which asubsequent fault (evolving or unsuccessful reclosure) results in a three-phase trip, that is,every second trip by the distance protection function trips all three phases. The autoreclosurefunction also signals the switchover to three-phase tripping by exciting the signal Trip 3-Pol atthe end of the fault discrimination time t Discrim. 1P.
It is advisable to set the time t1EvolFaults longer than the autoreclosure dead time t Dead1 1P.
t Timeout
The parameter t Timeout determines the period after the dead time within which the closesignal must be issued, otherwise a Def.Trip is generated and no further reclosure attempt ismade. Before a close command is issued at the end of every dead time, the logic [(synchroChckAND CO ready) OR Dead Line OR ExtSCBypas)] is checked and the command only enabledproviding all the criteria are correct within the setting of t Timeout.
Blocking time (t AR Block)
The autoreclosure function can be enabled or disabled by the following binary input signals:
• ExtBlkAR also blocks during the reclosure cycle• Manual close also blocks during the reclosure cycle• Inhibit Inp also blocks during the reclosure cycle• CB Ready blocks excepting during the reclosure cycle• CB2 Ready blocks excepting during the reclosure cycle 1)• CO Ready blocks at the end of the reclosure cycle after expiry of the time t time-out• CO Ready 2 blocks at the end of the reclosure cycle after expiry of the time t time-out 1)• Mast.noSucc blocks the follower CB after an unsuccessful reclosure attempt by the
master• CondBlkAR blocks excepting during the reclosure cycle
1) 2 denotes the inputs for CB2 in a duplex scheme.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 143Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Should a CondBlkAR signal occur during a reclosure cycle (that is, the AR in prog. signal isactive), it only becomes effective from the end of the current reclosure cycle and providing it isstill active.
A reclosure cycle remains blocked for the duration of the set blocking time t AR Block after thelast binary input has been enabled. Blocking also takes place during initialization of theprotection relay when its auxiliary supply is switched on or the parameter settings are beingloaded.
5.8.6.6 Supplementary information for binary inputsGUID-BDAEAA7A-3A27-4EAE-8068-C824A6E3085A v1
Starting and tripping signals from the protection function: Start (Start 2,Start 3), Trip CB and Trip CB 3P (Trip CB2, Trip CB3, Trip CB2 3P, Trip CB33P)
It is necessary to configure the three input signals Trip CB (general trip), Trip CB 3P (three-phase trip) and Start to control the autoreclosure function. The normal procedure to achievethis is to select the distance protection signals via the sub-menu OUTPUT FROM FUNCTION.As the autoreclosure function is completely independent, signals from other functions mayalso be selected.
Circuit-breaker ready signals: CB ready and CO Ready (CB2 ready and COReady 2)
The inputs for the parameters CO Ready and CB ready (or CO Ready 2 and CB2 ready in aduplex scheme) must be connected to the circuit-breakers to signal that they are ready toperform a complete reclosure cycle. In cases where one of the inputs is not used, it must be setto TRUE.
An active CB ready signal informs the autoreclosure function that reclosure is permissible(that is, sufficient energy is available for a full open/close/open cycle).
Once a reclosure cycle has started, this signal is ignored because the pressure varies during areclosure cycle of an air-blast breaker.
Resetting of this signal is internally delayed by 100 ms.
The CO Ready signal (close-open cycle can be carried out) is only effective during a reclosurecycle, that is, during the dead time. Should there be insufficient energy to open the circuit-breaker again following closure, the close signal is disabled and a Def. Trip (definitive trip) isgenerated.
This input is only used in conjunction with circuit-breakers, which provide the correspondinginformation (C-O query), for example, spring-charged and air-blast circuit-breakers with twoswitching energy levels.
Circuit-breaker open CB open (CB2 open)
It is also necessary to include the initial status of the circuit-breakers to prevent one fromreceiving a close signal, which was already open before the fault occurred.
The binary input CB open (and CB2 open in a duplex scheme) is thus provided to determine theinitial status of a circuit-breaker.
The pick-up of these signals is delayed by 100 ms to prevent any unwanted blocking of fastcircuit-breakers.
A circuit-breaker which was already open before the Start signal was received (CB open atlogical 1) is not closed by the autoreclosure function.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
144 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Where a circuit-breaker does not provide the necessary information (CB open signal), the inputmust be permanently set to off (F or False). Providing the scheme is also not a duplex scheme(that is, only one CB), the binary input CB2 open must also be permanently set to on (T orTrue).
Accordingly, these are the default settings for CB open and CB2 open.
The AR function can then operate with a single circuit-breaker without a CB open signal orsuperfluous close signal.
De-energized line Dead Line (Dead Line 2) with checking of synchronismsynchroChck (synchroChck2)
Before the Close CB (or Close CB2) instruction can be issued, either the Dead line or thesynchroChck I/P (or Dead line 2 or synchroChck2 in a duplex scheme) must be at logical 1.
Logic: [(synchroChck AND CO ready) OR Dead Line OR ExtSCBypas]
Logic: [(synchroChck2 AND CO ready 2) OR Dead Line 2 OR ExtSCBypas]
External blocking ExtBlkAR and CondBlkAR'
The reclosure function is always blocked by an active ExtBlkAR input.
An active CondBlkAR input will only block the function, providing a reclosure cycle is notrunning (that is, the AR in prog. signal is at logical 0).
The Cond.Blk AR signal is necessary to prevent a reclosure cycle, when reclosure is notrequired for the first trip that occurs during t Oper. This is the case, for example, for trips bythe switch-onto-fault (SOTF) protection or by a directional ground fault protection via PLC.
To prevent the SOFT from initiating autoreclosure, the distance protection SOFT start signalmust be connected to the CondBlkAR input.
Manual close
The reclosure function is immediately blocked (for the blocking time t AR Block) by a Manualclose signal. This signal is also needed for the overreaching logic to switch the ZExtensionsignal to on.
External synchrocheck bypass signal ExtSCBypas
This input provides facility for bypassing the synchroChck and CO Ready (or SynchroChck2and CO Ready 2 for CB2) enabling inputs.
It is only active for the first fast three-phase or single-phase reclosure attempt.
External extension of the dead time Extend t1
A logical 1 at the Extend t1 input extends the dead times t Dead1 1P and t Dead1 3P by thesetting t Dead1 Ext for the first (fast) reclosure attempt. This could be necessary, for example,in the event of a communication channel failure or in a redundant scheme.
5.8.6.7 Supplementary information for binary outputsGUID-A2D01995-187A-4A39-B18E-A8F2EBBBE624 v1
The most important autoreclosure output is the Close CB command. This output and 14 otheroutputs are provided.
This signal picks up when the closing command is issued and resets at the end of the time tClose or earlier if there is a tripping occurs upon reclosing.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 145Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Status of the autoreclosure function (AR Ready and AR Blocked)
The signal AR Ready is generated when the autoreclosure function is ready to perform areclosure cycle and the signal AR Blocked when it is blocked.
The AR Ready signal is active providing a reclosure cycle is not blocked (no AR Blocked signal)and a dead time is not running.
The AR Ready signal is active during a reclose command for purposes of enabling thesynchrocheck function (see Section 5.7.6.3, Synchrocheck).
Autoreclosure cycle in progress
There are six signals which show that a reclosure cycle is running and which stage has beenreached:
• AR in prog. reclosure cycle in progress• First AR 1P first single-phase reclosure attempt• First AR 3P first three-phase reclosure attempt• Second AR second reclosure attempt• Third AR third reclosure attempt• Fourth AR fourth reclosure attempt
The signal AR in prog. picks up at the start of the dead time and is reset by the falling edge ofthe last reclose command.
Circuit-breaker closing signals Close CB and Close CB2'
The CB closing command is normally assigned to a output relay by correspondinglyconfiguring the parameter Close CB (also Close CB2 in a duplex scheme).
A trip subsequent to a close command during the time t Close +300 ms switches the deadtime step (second, third and fourth AR) or initiates a lock-out trip (depending on the setting).A close command is reset immediately after a trip.
Definitive trip Def. Trip
The Def. Trip signal indicates that the circuit-breaker will remain tripped and no furtherreclosure attempts will be made. The following conditions can cause a definitive trip:
• All reclosure attempts were unsuccessful.• A starting or tripping signal was generated after the discrimination time and before dead
time.• Tripping takes place while a reclosure cycle is blocked (either via the blocking input or by
the reclaim time).• The synchroChck (or Dead line) and/or CO Ready inputs were not enabled during t
Timeout due to lack of synchronism.• The CB open signal is still active 300 ms after the close signal has reset (that is, the CB has
not responded to the close signal).• The trip signal that followed the start signal occurred after the fault duration time t Oper.• Tripping occurred for a phase fault and the mode selected for the first reclosure cycle is
1P-1P or 1P-3P.
Perform three-phase trip Trip 3-Pol
The Trip 3-Pol output instructs the line protection to trip all three phases.
The signal can be externally or internally connected.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
146 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
This signal is generated automatically, if reclosure is blocked, CB Ready is inactive, the CB isopen, the single-phase discrimination time t1P Discrim has elapsed or the signal First AR 3P isactive.
Zone extension ZExtension
The setting of the autoreclosure parameter ZE Prefault determines the pre-fault reach of thedistance protection when the autoreclosure function is inactive (before the first fault), that is,setting ZE Prefault to on activates the output signal ZExtension which then switches thedistance function to overreach.
The parameters ZE 1. AR reach to ZE 4. AR reach provide facility for individually switching thereach for each reclosure attempt. Setting one of these parameters to on means that theZExtension output is at logical 1 and the distance relay is switched to overreach either beforefault occurrence or for the following reclosure attempt, otherwise the distance relay is set tounderreach.
With the exception of its first change of state when setting the ZEPrefault parameter to ON itresets together with the signal Trip CB or Trip CB 3P, this signal picks up and resets togetherwith the Close CB signal.
The distance relay is switched to overreaching for a Manual close.
It is switched to underreaching when the autoreclosure function is blocked.
Note also that the ZExtension signal is connected to the binary input ZEMode AR of the zoneextension logic in the distance protection function.
5.8.7 Timing diagramsGUID-EB943681-2270-41A7-81AC-C18A80DCAA35 v1
The time relationship between the various signals during operation of the autoreclosurefunction can be seen from the following diagrams.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 147Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
18000052-IEC19000457-1-en.vsdx
Tri p CB
Start
Close CB
ZExtension
Def. Trip
First AR 1P
Trip CB 3P
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P
time < t Oper.
Trip 3-Pol
t Discrim. 1P
Trip CB
Start
Close CB
ZExtension
Def. Trip
First AR 1P
Trip CB 3P
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Inhibit. t Dead1 1P
time < t Oper.
Trip 3-Pol
t Discrim. 1P
Unsuccessful AR
Successful AR
t Close
300 ms
IEC19000457 V1 EN-US
Figure 53: Timing diagram for a single or double busbar arrangement with one distanceand one AR function >> Response for ground fault
Settings:
• 1. AR Mode = 1P-1P or 1P3P-1P3P• 2..4. AR Mode = off• ZE Prefault = on• ZE 1. AR = off
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
148 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
18000053-IEC19000458-1-en.vsdx
t Inhibit.t Dead1 1P
time < t Oper.
t Discrim. 1P
t Close
300 ms
Trip CB
Start
Def. Trip
Trip CB 3P
AR in Prog .
AR Ready
AR Block ed
Trip 3-Pol
Successful AR (evolving fault du ring ‘t Di s crim1P’)
Close CB
ZExtension
First A R 1P
First A R 3P
time < t Oper.
t Dead1 1P
Trip CB
Start
Trip CB 3P
Unsuccessful AR (evolving fault within ‘t Dead1 1P’,
but after ‘t Di s crim1P’)
Close CB
ZExtension
Def. Trip
First A R 1P
AR in Prog .
AR Ready
AR Block ed
Trip 3-Pol
t Discrim. 1P
IEC19000458 V1 EN-US
Figure 54: Timing diagram for a single or double busbar arrangement with one distanceand one AR function >> Response for a ground fault which evolves
Settings:
• 1. AR Mode = 1P3P-1P3P• '2..4. AR Mode' = 'off'• ZE Prefault = on• ZE 1. AR = off
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 149Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
18000054-IEC19000459-1-en.vsdx
Trip CB 3P
Start
Close CB
ZExtension
Def. Trip
Trip CB
First AR 3P
Second A R
Third A R
time < t Oper.
Trip CB 3P
Start
Close CB
ZExtension
Def. Trip
Trip CB
First AR 3P
Second A R
Third A R
time < t Oper.
Unsuccessful AR
Successful AR
t Close
AR in Prog .
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 3P t Dead2 t Dead3
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog .
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 3P t Dead2 t Dead3 t Inhibit.
Trip 3-Pol
300 ms
IEC19000459 V1 EN-US
Figure 55: Timing diagram for a single or double busbar arrangement with one distanceand one AR function >> Response for phase faults
Settings:
• 1. AR Mode = 1P3P-1P3P,• 2..4. AR Mode = 3AR• ZE Prefault = on• ZE 1. AR = off,• ZE 2. AR = on• ZE 3. AR = off
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
150 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
18000055-IEC19000460-1-en.vsdx
Trip CB
Start
Close CB
ZExtension
Def. Trip
First AR 1P
Trip CB 3P
AR in Pro g.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Trip 3-Pol
Main protection 2, AR blocked (because main protection 1 ready)
Main protection 1, AR ready
Trip CB
Start
Close CB
ZExtension
Def. Trip
First AR 1P
Trip CB 3P
AR in Pro g.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t inhibit. t De ad1 1P
time < t Oper.
Trip 3-Pol
t D iscrim. 1P
t clo se
300 ms
IEC19000460 V1 EN-US
Figure 56: Timing diagram for scheme with main protections 1 and 2 (REB500sys), bothequipped with an autoreclosure function — Main protection 1 is in operation>> Response for successful autoreclosure
Settings:
• 1. AR Mode = 1P-1P or 1P3P-1P3P• 2..4. AR Mode = off• Zextension = on• ZE 1. AR = off
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 151Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
18000056-IEC19000461-1-en.vsdx
Main protection 2, AR active ( because main protection1 not ready)
Main protection 1, AR not ready
Trip CB
Start
Close CB
ZExtension
Def. Tr ip
First AR 1P
Trip CB 3P
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Trip 3-Pol
Trip CB
Start
Close CB
ZExtension
Def. Tr ip
First AR 1P
Trip CB 3P
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t inhibit. t Dead1 1P
time < t Oper.
Trip 3-Pol
t D iscrim. 1P
t Close
300 ms
IEC19000461 V1 EN-US
Figure 57: Timing diagram for scheme with main protections 1 and 2 (REB500sys), bothequipped with an autoreclosure function — Main protection 1 not in operation>> Response for successful autoreclosure
Settings:
• 1. AR Mode = 1P-1P or 1P3P-1P3P• 2..4. AR Mode = off• Zextension = on• ZE 1. AR = off
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
152 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
18000057-IEC19000462-1-en.vsdx
Trip CB
Start
Close CB
ZExtension
Def. Tr ip
First AR 1P
Trip CB 3P
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Trip 3-Pol
Main protection 2, AR blocked (because main protection 1 ready)
Main protection 1, AR ready
Trip CB
Start
Close CB
ZExtension
Def. Tr ip
First AR 1P
Trip CB 3P
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P
time < t Oper.
Tr ip 3-Pol
t Discrim. 1P
IEC19000462 V1 EN-US
Figure 58: Timing diagram for scheme with main protections 1 and 2 (REB500sys), bothequipped with an autoreclosure function — Main protection 1 in operation >>Response for unsuccessful autoreclosure
Settings:
• 1. AR Mode = 1P-1P or 1P3P-1P3P• 2..4. AR Mode = off• Zextension = on• ZE 1. AR = off
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 153Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
18000058-IEC19000463-1-en.vsdx
Main protection 2, AR active ( because main protection 1 not ready)
Main protection 1 not ready
Trip CB
Start
Close CB
ZExtension
Def. Tr ip
First AR 1P
Trip CB 3P
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Trip 3-Pol
Trip CB
Start
Close CB
ZExtension
Def. Tr ip
First AR 1P
Trip CB 3P
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P
time < t Oper.
Tr ip 3-Pol
t Discrim. 1P
IEC19000463 V1 EN-US
Figure 59: Timing diagram for scheme with main protections 1 and 2 (REB500sys), bothequipped with an autoreclosure function — Main protection 1 not in operation>> Response for unsuccessful autoreclosure
Settings:
• 1. AR Mode = 1P-1P or 1P3P-1P3P,• 2..4. AR Mode = off• Zextension = on• ZE 1. AR = off
5.8.8 Checking the dead timesGUID-AB1C349F-B540-4E71-B77D-D3DA75A571CE v1
When commissioning the autoreclosure function, it is not sufficient to check the combinedoperation of protection function, autoreclosure function and circuit-breaker, the resultingdead times must also be determined.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
154 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Since the dead time settings do not correspond to the effective total dead times, especially ina scheme with two circuit-breakers (see Figure 60), the period during which the circuit-breakeris actually open must be measured. This entails adjusting the dead time until the measuredbreaker time minus arcing and pre-ignition times and the inevitable CB tolerances result in anadequate composite dead time.
Providing the circuit-breakers at both ends of the line are of the same type and thus permit thesame tolerances to be assumed at both ends, the same dead time tp can be set in the twoterminal stations. Where this is not the case, the tripping and closing times of the two circuit-breakers must also be measured in addition to the dead times. The dead times set for the twoautoreclosure functions must then ensure that a sufficiently long “overlapping” dead timeexists to enable the circuit-breakers to deionize.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 155Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
180000059-IEC19000464-1-en.vsdx
C
O
B
0 1
2
3
4
5
6
(t)
t7
t6
t4
t2
t5t3
t1
tP
tWtS
C
O
A
0 1
2
34
5
6
A B
IEC19000464 V1 EN-US
Figure 60: Resulting composite dead time (Source: Guidelines for autoreclosure inelectrical power systems published by the German Association of PowerUtilities VDEW)
Where,
A: circuit-breaker 1 B: circuit-breaker 2
C: closed position O: open position
0: start 1: trip signal
2: contacts part 3: current interrupted
4: close signal 5: current flows again
6: contacts make t2: reclosing time
t1: tripping time t4: dead time
t3: arc extinction time t6: duration of interrupt
t5: pre-ignition time t7: resulting dead time
tp: dead time ts: inhibit time
tw: fault duration
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
156 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.9 Directional sensitive EF protection for groundedsystem 67N (DIREFGND)
5.9.1 Mode of operationGUID-2BFEE0BB-FBF7-404A-BA3F-A7CF1102EDE6 v1
High-resistance ground faults, which cannot be detected by the distance protection, can stillcause appreciable problems in spite of the relatively low fault currents involved.
The sensitive ground fault protection function has been included to complement the main lineprotection function and cover the low ground fault current range. The protection processesthe zero-sequence components 3I0 and 3U0.
5.9.2 FeaturesGUID-3D33BB3F-7C82-41CB-B322-7778B31D585C v1
• Insensitive to DC component• Insensitive to harmonics• Directional measurement of zero-sequence components (derived either internally or
externally)• Current pick-up enabling level• Reference voltage enabling level• Adjustable characteristic angle• Permissive and blocking transfer tripping schemes• Echo logic for weak infeed and open circuit-breaker• Transient blocking logic for reversal of energy direction
5.9.3 Inputs and outputs
5.9.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-CB029954-E781-47DD-ACCC-5BF0449C0C69 v1
• Voltage• Current
5.9.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-FCC3913A-72BB-43CD-B109-AD984CC4475A v1
• External blocking• Receive• CB closed• VT supervision• Starting and tripping by the distance function
5.9.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-BF84DA2A-D873-4040-A306-DC404723E033 v1
• Pick-up• Trip• Fault forwards• Fault backwards• Transmit• Block distance protection receive
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 157Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.9.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-4F266B55-988B-4E45-9509-C1016AAD18DC v1
• Neutral voltage (3U0)• Neutral current (3I0)• Real power component of neutral power (3U0 × 3I0, not rotated)• Apparent power component of neutral power (3U0 × 3I0, not rotated)• Fault direction (1 = forwards, -1 = backwards; this variable only applies when the binary
input CB closed is active)
5.9.4 Function settingsGUID-EFA80494-FF22-4492-B958-A730DBCE3E47 v1
Table 89: Directional sensitive EF protection for grounded system function - settings
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select)
VoltageInp CT/VT-Addr VT U1-U3
CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr CT I1-I3
CTneutral Line side (Select)
I-Setting IN 0.100 0.100 1.000 0.01
V-Setting UN 0.200 0.003 1.000 0.001
Angle deg 60.0 -90.0 90.0 5
ComMode Permissive (Select)
SendMode MeasBwd (Select)
1 Channel off (Select)
Echo off (Select)
tBasic s 0.050 0.000 1.000 0.001
tWait s 0.050 0.000 0.500 0.001
tTransBlk s 0.100 0.000 0.500 0.001
Ext block BinaryAddr Always off
Receive BinaryAddr Always off
CB closed BinaryAddr Always off
VT Superv BinaryAddr Always off
Ext Start L1 BinaryAddr Always off
Ext Start L2 BinaryAddr Always off
Ext Start L3 BinaryAddr Always off
ExtTrip 3P BinaryAddr Always off
ExtTrip BinaryAddr Always off
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr
MeasFwd SignalAddr
MeasBwd SignalAddr
Send SignalAddr
Recve Inh. SignalAddr
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
158 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.9.5 ParametersGUID-3F728BFA-DB7A-4D26-A4F2-C09D5B846478 v1
Table 90: Directional sensitive EF protection for grounded system function - parameters
Signal Description
ParSet 4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function isactive.
VoltageInp Defines the VT input channel. All the VT input channels are available for selection.
CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel. All the CT input channels are available for selection.
CT neutral Side of the CTs on which the star-point is formed (current direction):
• line• busbar (reversed connection)
I-Setting Current pick-up setting
V-Setting Reference voltage pick-up setting
Angle Characteristic angle setting
ComMode Kind of transfer tripping scheme:
• permissive• blocking
SendMode For what system condition a signal is transmitted in an intertripping scheme:
• forwards measurement (only permissive scheme)• non-directional (only blocking scheme)• backwards measurement (only blocking scheme)
1 Channel Supplementary logic needed for coordinating ground fault and distanceprotections when using the same communications channel for a permissivescheme.
• off• on
Echo Echo logic for weak infeed and open CB:
• off Echo logic disabled• Weak Echo only for weak infeed• Bkr Echo only when CB open• Weak & Bkr Echo for weak infeed or CB open
tBasic Basic time setting
tWait Time allowed for a blocking signal to be transferred and for the directionalcomparison to be made.
tTransBlk Blocking time after a reversal of fault energy direction (transient blocking).
Ext Block I/P for an external blocking signal.
• F: enabled• T: disabled• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Receive PLC receive input.
• F: no PLC receive signal• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Table continues on next page
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 159Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Signal Description
CB closed CB position indicator input.
• F: function disabled• T: function enabled• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
VT Superv supervision input.
• F: tripping enabled• T: tripping disabled• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Ext Start L1Ext Start L2Ext Start L3Ext Trip 3PExt Trip
Inputs for the distance function signals Start L1, Start L2, Start L3, Trip CB 3P andTrip CB for coordinating operation.
• F: not connected• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Trip Tripping signal.
Start Output for signaling that the protection has picked up, that is, the current hasexceeded the enabling setting (I-Setting).
MeasFwd O/P for signaling a fault in the forwards direction.
MeasBwd O/P for signaling a fault in the backwards direction.
Send PLC transmit signal.
5.9.6 Configuration
5.9.6.1 Coordination with the distance protectionGUID-E9376218-990F-48DA-BC17-10D3136FA975 v1
Directional ground fault function as ancillary to the distance function
Compared with a standalone ground fault function, the ground fault function integrated in thedistance function needs certain starting and tripping signals generated by the distancefunction and the E/F protection is blocked in the following situations:
• starting of more than one distance phase• three-phase tripping• any trip (single and three-phase), if 1 Channel is set to on
Scheme with independent communication channels
Apart from the added security of redundancy, independent communication channels enabledifferent transfer tripping schemes to be used for ground fault and distance protections.
Providing the distance protection can detect a fault, it should trip before the ground faultprotection picks up. For this reason, the basic operating time (tBasic) for the ground faultprotection must be set longer than the longest response time to be expected of the distanceprotection.
Scheme with a common communication channel
Where ground fault and distance protections use the same communication channel, thetransfer tripping schemes must be either both permissive or both blocking. In the case ofpermissive schemes, in which the distance protection operates with non-directional criteria atone end for a weak infeed, a supplementary logic must be enabled by appropriately setting theparameter 1 Channel.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
160 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
This supplementary logic interlocks the distance protection receive signal at the end of theground fault function’s basic time or when it picks up in the backwards direction. To this end,the signal RecveInh is connected to the distance protection input ExtBlkHF. Thus thecommunication channel is initially available for use by the distance protection and only madeavailable to the ground fault protection at the end of the basic time. The basic time settingmust allow adequate time for the distance protection to detect and clear a fault if it can.
Independent directional ground fault protection
The ground fault function can also be applied as a stand-alone function, but only in MV and HVsystems.
The coordination of ground fault and distance protections in this case is achieved byappropriately setting the parameter tBasic.
If this time is too short, there is a likelihood that the ground fault protection will issue a three-phase trip before the circuit-breaker has opened for faults that have been correctly detectedby the distance protection.
The basic time of the ground fault protection must therefore be long enough to ensure thatthe distance protection can trip phase-selectively.
No facility is provided for using the distance relay starters to achieve phase-selective trippingby the directional ground fault function.
An independent directional ground fault function requires its own communication channel,which must be entirely independent of the distance protection.
5.9.6.2 Choice of operating modeGUID-6E522528-4761-40F6-A69B-97C1D5069710 v1
It is assumed that the ground fault protection settings at both ends of the protected line arethe same. This applies especially to the basic time, the blocking time, the transfer trippingscheme in use and options.
5.9.6.3 Choice of transfer tripping schemeGUID-692976A1-6A65-42D4-BEB9-AF17A9234C94 v1
In the case of a permissive directional comparison scheme, the amount of fault resistance,which can be detected, reduces towards the remote end of the line, because the enablingcurrent must be exceeded at both ends. Without additional precautions, the use of apermissive scheme would be limited on lines with a weak infeed at one end.
It was possible to eliminate this disadvantage by providing the directional ground faultprotection with its own echo logic for weak infeeds, which can be switched in and out asrequired.
The protection only operates in a comparison mode during the comparisontime (1 s) and is blocked at the end of this time. The comparison time starts atthe end of the basic time. information icon alerts the reader of important factsand conditions.
On the other hand, a directional comparison scheme using a blocking signal is able to detecthigh-resistance ground faults along the whole length of the line, because the protection at thestrong infeed end is always able to trip although the current at the weak infeed end does notreach the enabling level.
Permissive directional comparison scheme
In this scheme, each of the protection functions has to receive a signal from the opposite endof line in order to be able to trip. A protection function sends a permissive signal when its
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 161Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
current exceeds the enabling level I-setting, the basic time tBasic has expired and the faultdetected is in the forwards direction.
Options:
• Echo Bkr:ProvidingThis parameter is active, a permissive signal (echo) is sent to the opposite end of the line,if the local circuit-breaker is open and a signal is received. Tripping is thus possible at theinfeed end.The duration of the echo signal is limited to 150 ms.
• Non-directional echo (Weak infeed)If the directional ground fault function at the weak infeed end of a line cannot measure,because the reference voltage is too low or the current does not reach the enabling level, asignal is returned to the opposite end of the line if one is received.This enables tripping to take place at the end with the stronger infeed.
ANDANDAND
ANDANDAND
tBasictBasicStart
ANDANDAND
ANDANDAND
tBasictBasicStart
Send
Receive
Send
Receive
Rel. 1 Rel. 2
18000060-IEC19000465-1-en.vsdx
FWD
RVS
Dir
ectio
na
l
Ch
ara
cte
ristic
INx>INx>
FWD
RVS
Dire
ctio
na
l
Ch
ara
cte
ristic
INx>INx>
A1 A2
IEC19000465 V1 EN-US
Figure 61: Principle of a permissive directional comparison scheme
where:
• Start: current higher than the enabling level I-setting• tBasic : basic time• MeasFwd: fault in forwards direction
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
162 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
18000061-IEC19000466-1-en.vsdx
I0
U0
I-dir
I-Setting
V-Setting
Iasymm
Tx: I-Setting MeasFwd tBasic T: I-Setting MeasFwd tBasic Rx
TB: MeasBwd t TransBlk
<Tx: MeasBwd Rx>
TB: MeasBwd t TransBlk
<Tx: MeasBwd Rx>
Echo
Echo and “Transient blocking”
Basic functions
IEC19000466 V1 EN-US
Figure 62: Operation of a permissive directional comparison scheme
where:
• <...>: optional function• Iasymm: asymmetrical currents under normal load conditions• I-dir: current enable for directional measurement (= 0.7 I-Setting)• I-Setting: current enabling level• MeasBwd: fault in backwards direction including Transient blocking• MeasBwd': fault in backwards direction• MeasFwd: fault in forwards direction• Rx: receive• T: trip• t TransBlk: blocking time• TB: transient blocking• tBasic: basic time• tWait: waiting time• Tx: send• V-setting: reference voltage
Blocking directional comparison scheme
Providing the conditions for directional measurement are fulfilled, that is, the current higherthan I-dir and the voltage higher than its enabling level V-setting, a protection functiontransmits a blocking signal to the remote station immediately when a fault is detected in thebackward direction.
I-dir = 0.7 I-Setting
A protection function measuring a fault in the direction of the protected line trips at the end ofthe adjustable waiting time tWait, providing a blocking signal is not received beforehand.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 163Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Options:
• SendMode: non-directionalA blocking signal is transmitted in this mode, if the current is higher than I-dir, the basictime has expired and no fault is detected in the forwards direction (including situationswhen a direction measurement is impossible, because 3U0 < V-Setting).
ANDANDAND
ANDANDAND
tBasictBasic
Send
Receive
Rel. 1
18000062-IEC19000467-1-en.vsdx
RVS
FWD
Dir
ectio
na
l
Ch
ara
cte
ristic
INx>
tWaittWait
tBasictBasic
IN>DirIN>Dir
ANDANDAND
ANDANDAND
tBasictBasic
Send
ReceiveRVS
FWD
Dir
ectio
na
l
Ch
ara
cte
ristic
INx>
tWaittWait
tBasictBasic
IN>DirIN>Dir
Rel. 2
A1 A2
IEC19000467 V1 EN-US
Figure 63: Principle of a blocking scheme
where:
• I-dir: current enable for directional measurement (= 0.7 I-Setting)• I-Setting: current enabling level• MeasFwd: fault in forwards direction• MeasBwd': fault in backwards direction• tBasic: basic time• tWait: waiting time
18000063-IEC19000468-1-en.vsdx
I0
U0
I-dir
I-Setting
U-Setting
Iasymm
Tx: I-dir MeasBwd tBasic
<+I-dir MeasFwd tBasic>
D: I-Setting MeasFwd tBasic R tWait
TB: MeasBwd tTransBl
Tx: I-dir MeasBwd tBasic
<+I-dir MeasFwd tBasic>
TB: MeasBwd tTransBl
<S: I-dir
MeasFwd tBasic>
Non-directional transmission
Basic functions
V-Setting
I-Setting
I-dir
I0
U0
Iasym m
IEC19000468 V1 EN-US
Figure 64: Operation of a blocking scheme
where:
• <...>: optional function• Iasymm: asymmetrical currents under normal load conditions• I-dir: current enable for directional measurement (= 0.7 I-Setting)
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
164 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
• I-Setting: current enabling level• MeasBwd: fault in backwards direction including Transient blocking• MeasBwd': fault in backwards direction• MeasFwd: fault in forwards direction• Rx: receive• T: trip• t TransBlk: blocking time• TB: transient blocking• tBasic: basic time• tWait: waiting time• Tx: send• V-setting: reference voltage
5.9.6.4 Setting the enabling pick-up levelsGUID-E1B70D52-C69A-43A2-AA45-C8502F086DE2 v1
The setting of the current enabling I-dir must take account of the zero-sequence component innormal operation arising from system asymmetries.
The pick-up setting for the voltage enabling signal V-Setting is determined by the level ofasymmetries on the secondary side (VT tolerances, asymmetrical burdens etc.).
The ability to read voltage and current values on the relay is a useful aid for determining thesesettings.
For example, if the enabling current setting I-Setting is too low, the pick-up signal lightscontinuously (current circuit enabled).
Since a ground fault causes asymmetrical voltages in the vicinity of the fault, the currentflowing via the system capacitances also has a zero-sequence component. A capacitive currentof this kind on a long line lies within the setting range of the sensitive ground fault protectionfunction.
The pick-up level I-dir of the current circuit for the directional measurement has a fixed settingof 0.7 × I-Setting to take account of influences, such as CT errors and the capacitive chargingcurrents of the line.
The following procedure is recommended for setting the pick-up levels:
• The enabling current for the directional measurement must be set to at least twice themaximum possible asymmetrical current, which can occur in normal operation.
-Setting 2.0asymm
N
II
I
• The voltage pick-up must be set to 1.6 times the level of the spurious voltages, which canoccur due to asymmetries in the VT secondary circuit.
- sec.asymm
N
UV Setting 1.6
U
where:
• Iasymm: current component 3I0 caused by asymmetrical load currents• IN: primary CT rated current• I-Setting: setting of the enabling current
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 165Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
• UN: 100 V or 200 V according to VT unit in use• Usec.asymm: voltage component 3U0 caused by asymmetries in the VT secondary circuit
(for example, VT errors)• V-Setting: setting of the enabling voltage for the directional measurement
5.9.6.5 Setting the characteristic angleGUID-D6147D84-E5FB-4E1F-B114-0F4C7864946E v1
The line marking the reversal of direction lies at ±90° in relation to the reference voltage.
To achieve symmetrical operation of the directional element in spite of this, the characteristicangle should be equal that of the zero-sequence impedance of the source.
5.9.6.6 Setting the basic time (tBasic)GUID-531CDD9D-C567-43B4-946F-31C9348D726C v1
The basic time is the period between pick-up of the protection and the earliest possible trip.
The operation of the protection function can be coordinated with others on the same line byjudiciously setting the basic time.
The basic time is also used to achieve coordination between the ground fault function (three-phase tripping) and the distance function (phase-selective tripping). The ground faultprotection is delayed to allow time for the distance protection to respond to a fault if it ispossible.
The basic time is normally set to:
tBasic > max. tripping time of the phase-selective distance protection (taking account of signaltransmission time and sequential tripping)
+ CB operating time
+ aux. contact time (input CB closed)
+ safety margin
The sum of these times is usually about 100 to 200 ms.
5.9.6.7 Circuit-breaker delayGUID-0F4DD3FD-FE64-4784-BA07-69EFF6C0C9F8 v1
To avoid operation of the enabling current detector during the transient oscillations, whichoccur following the closing of the circuit-breaker, it is blocked for 50 ms upon receiving thecorresponding signal from the CB.
5.9.6.8 Comparison timeGUID-32875FF0-D8CE-4860-BD15-09FAB2469AF8 v1
The comparison time is the time allowed for the directional comparison to be made and istherefore dependent on the type of transfer tripping scheme.
The comparison time has a fixed setting of 1 s.
5.9.6.9 Setting the wait time (tWait)GUID-CA14249E-57B2-4E96-A6C9-BD2D0FB9F99C v1
The waiting time is also started at the end of the basic time, but is only effective in a blockingscheme.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
166 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
In a blocking scheme, tripping is delayed by the setting of tWait to allow time for theprotection at the remote end to decide on the direction of the fault and to transmit acorresponding blocking signal, if necessary.
tWait should be set at least as long as the measuring time (about 30 ms) plus the longestpossible signal transmission time.
5.9.6.10 Setting the transient blocking time (t TransBlk)GUID-4B3A8D0A-C2FF-4303-843F-DCD831178124 v1
The protection function includes a transient blocking logic to prevent any mal-operationduring the course of tripping a fault or autoreclosure on double-circuit lines, when there is alikelihood of the flow of energy reversing direction. The time setting can be selected in a widerange to suit the prevailing conditions.
For example, after a fault has been detected in the backwards direction, a second directionaldecision in the forwards direction is inhibited for the setting of t TransBlk.
The time chosen is determined largely by the time required for the measurement to reset andthe transfer tripping scheme in use.
The recommended setting is 60 ms plus the reset time of the communication channel.
5.9.6.11 CT/VT inputs of the functionGUID-E238F9D9-12D1-428D-984B-93F37D0D5173 v1
Where the zero-sequence components of the voltages and the currents are derived internally,the CT and VT inputs must be connected precisely as shown in the wiring diagram. The neutralof the CTs in this case is formed on the line side and the parameter CT neutral must be set toline side.
5.9.6.12 Supplementary information for binary inputsGUID-75464C67-88D9-463F-BB75-563F5B765F94 v1
Ext Block
Applying a signal to the Ext. Block input disables the entire protection function.
Receive
The signal transmitted by the protection at the remote end is connected to this input.
CB closed
The CB closed input is intended for the position indicator signal from the circuit-breaker andhas a fixed pick-up delay of 50 ms. The protection function is only enabled when this signal isreceived to confirm that the CB is closed. The corresponding auxiliary contacts for the threephases must be connected in series to ensure that the protection does not operate duringsingle-phase reclosure.
The echo logic is enabled 100 ms after the circuit-breaker is opened.
VT Supervision
The VT Superv input is needed to block the echo logic. It can be excited either by the VTSupsignal from the internal distance protection function or an auxiliary contact on the MCB via abinary input.
If this input is not needed, it must be set to F.
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 167Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Ext Start L1. Ext Start L2, Ext Start L3, Ext Trip 3P, Ext Trip
These inputs are for coordinating operation with the distance protection function. To themare connected the distance function signals Start L1, Start L2, Start L3, Trip CB 3P and TripCB.
They must be set to F if an independent directional ground fault scheme is in use.
5.9.6.13 Supplementary information for binary outputsGUID-C44B0120-A06C-4E67-9516-5FCFD1329619 v1
Trip
There are two Trip signals, one for energizing the tripping relay via the tripping logic and theother for controlling LEDs and signaling contacts.
Start
An active Start output signals that the zero-sequence current has exceeded the pick-upsetting I-Setting. This signal is only generated providing the function is not blocked.
MeasFwd
MeasFwd is active when the measuring element detects a fault in the forwards direction, thatis, the settings of I-dir and V-setting have been exceeded.
MeasBwd
MeasBwd is active when the measuring element detects a fault in the backwards direction,that is, the settings of I-dir and V-setting have been exceeded.
Send
The Send output is the signal sent to the remote end of the line.
Receive Inhibit
The Recve Inh signal prevents the distance function from receiving a PLC signal (see Section5.9.6.1). It is only generated when the parameter 1 Channel is set, the basic time has expired orthe ground fault protection picks up for a reverse fault.
The signal Recve Inh must be connected to the distance function input ExtBlkHF.
5.10 Inverse time earth fault overcurrent protection 51N(I0INV)
5.10.1 Mode of operationGUID-E5F6C837-2144-4F8A-AA85-43A583DE3E31 v1
Overcurrent function with inverse time characteristic. A typical application is as back-up forthe ground fault protection function, in which case it measures 3 I0 either supplied from anexternal source or internally derived.
5.10.2 FeaturesGUID-65205166-1E80-4340-989B-7ADB304A4F83 v1
• Tripping characteristic according to British Standard 142:c = 0.02: normal inversec = 1: very inverse and long time earth fault
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
168 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
c = 2: extremely inverse• Insensitive to DC component• Insensitive to harmonics• External 3 I0 signal or 3 I0 internally derived from the three-phase currents• Wider setting range than specified in BS 142
5.10.3 Inputs and outputs
5.10.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-5EABFB3B-A068-4F53-A182-4442888C417C v1
• Current
5.10.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-B6536C2D-81FD-4FC1-9795-E7F169FB12B2 v1
• Blocking
5.10.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-E4B40A3A-E822-4016-9FA6-8FEED6DF0842 v1
• Starting• Tripping
5.10.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-781E4787-7BED-4D41-B2BB-44121AACEE17 v1
• Neutral current
5.10.4 Function settingsGUID-E3F8BFC3-6B93-47A9-98DE-2C0730B455EA v1
Table 91: Inverse time earth fault overcurrent function - settings
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select)
c-Setting 1.00 (Select)
k1-Setting s 013.5 0.01 200.0 0.01
IStart IB 1.10 1.00 4.00 0.01
tmin s 00.0 00.0 10.0 0.1
NrOfPhases 1 1 3 2
CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr 0
IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.04 2.50 0.01
BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 169Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.10.5 ParametersGUID-546BE3C2-EB4B-4877-92B1-A62C22782EC4 v1
Table 92: Inverse time earth fault overcurrent function - parameters
Signal Description
ParSet4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function isactive.
CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel. All the current channels are available for selection.
c-Setting Setting for the exponential factor determining the shape of the operatingcharacteristic according to BS 142 or for selecting the RXIDG characteristic.
k1-Setting Tripping characteristic constant
IStart Pick-up setting (initiates the tripping characteristic).
tmin Definite minimum time of the tripping characteristic.
NrOfPhases Number of phases evaluated for measurement:
• 1: neutral current direct from an CT input• 3: neutral current derived internally from the three phases
IB-Setting Reference current to take account of discrepancies with respect to IN.
BlockingInp I/P for the external blocking signal.
• F: unused• T: function always blocked• xx: all binary I/P's (or O/P's of protection functions)
Trip Tripping signal
Start Pick-up signal
5.10.6 ConfigurationGUID-7782BCDB-EEF4-4AE5-8B8A-204E8D180EFE v1
Protection function enable IStart
The function starts to run when the current applied to the function exceeds the setting IStart.IStart is normally set to 1.1 IB.
Choice of tripping characteristic c-Setting
The shape of the IDMT characteristic is determined by the constant c.
The standard IDMT characteristics according to BS 142 are:
normal inverse: c = 0.02
very inverse and long time earthfault:
c = 1.00
extremely inverse: c = 2.00
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
170 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
180000064-IEC19000469-1-en.vsdx
t
I
IStart
IB
t =
k1
I
IB
c
1
tmin
IEC19000469 V1 EN-US
Figure 65: Tripping characteristic of Inverse time earth fault overcurrent protection
The c-Setting can also be set to RXIDG, in which case the functions inverse characteristiccorresponds to that of the relay Type RXIDG:
[ ] 5.8 1.35 ( )Bt s Ln I I
The parameter k1-Setting has no influence in this case.
Multiplier k1-Setting
The multiplier k1-Setting enables the earth fault overcurrent inverse time characteristic to beshifted. This is used for grading a series of relays along a line to achieve discrimination.
For example, in the case of the very inverse characteristic, the constant c = 1 and the factor k1 ≤13.5. The operating time t is given by the equation:
1
031
B
kt
I
I
Assuming a grading time of 0.5 s at 6 times the base current IB is required, the factor k1 foreach of the relays is given by:
k1 = 5 t
For operating times between 0.5 and 2.5 s, this results in the following settings for k1:
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 171Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
t [s] k1 [s]
0.5 2.5
1 5
1.5 7.5
2 10
2,5 12.5
The characteristics according to BS 142 are set as follows:
normal inverse: k1 = 0.14 s
very inverse: k1 = 13.5 s
extremely inverse: k1 = 80 s
long time earth fault: k1 = 120 s
Definite minimum time tmin
Where the inverse time earth fault overcurrent function is being applied as backup protectionfor a directional ground fault protection, the definite minimum time tmin must be set asfollows:
• tmin = tbasic + tcomp• tbasic = basic time of the ground fault function• tcomp = comparison time of the ground fault function (1 s)
Interconnections between Inverse time earth fault overcurrentprotection and directional E/F functions
The inverse time earth fault overcurrent protection is non-directional.
Directional operation can, however, be achieved by linking the directional signal (MeasFwd,that is, fault in forwards direction) from the ground fault protection to the blocking input ofthe inverse time earth fault overcurrent protection. The input must be inverted so thatblocking of the function is cancelled by an active forwards signal.
When using this arrangement, it must be noted that, when MeasFwd does not pick up, the I0-Invers function cannot trip when the reference voltage of the ground fault function is too low.If tripping is required for this case, the directional ground fault signal MeasBwd must beapplied to the blocking input.
Applications with single-phase reclosure
In schemes involving single-phase reclosure, the I0-Invers function has to be blocked for thetime that one pole of a circuit-breakers is open if the minimum tripping time tmin is set lessthan the single-phase dead time. This avoids false three-phase tripping due to the loadcurrents in the healthy phases.
Typical settings
• IB: to be calculated• IStart: 1.1 IB• c: depends on the protected unit• k1: to be calculated• tmin: 0.00
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
172 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.11 Logic/Trip Logic (LOGIC)
5.11.1 Mode of operationGUID-96D3CFD9-0D98-4926-BE3D-BAF8095A4F96 v1
Logical combination of binary input signals or of output signals from the protection functions,for example, for:
• specific signals required by the application• supplementary protection functions
5.11.2 FeaturesGUID-3DB24C13-336F-4644-88F0-A2F8F5A37902 v1
• Binary input channels assignable to:
• binary input signals• protection function output signals
• All input channels can be inverted• Following logic functions available for selection:
• OR gate with 4 inputs• AND gate with 4 inputs• R/S flip-flop with 2 inputs for setting and 2 inputs for resetting:
• The output is 0, if at least one of the reset inputs is 1.• The output is 1, if at least one of the set inputs is 1 AND none of the reset
inputs is 1.• The output status is sustained when all the inputs are at 0.
• Every logic has an additional blocking input, which when activated switches theoutput to 0.
5.11.3 Inputs and outputs
5.11.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-8E843CD7-DFCF-451A-9D4E-8C4505AE706C v1
• None
5.11.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-A1855F4E-9841-47BD-9978-B00A139C02A6 v1
• 4 logic inputs• Blocking
5.11.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-FCB2413A-EC87-4AE4-BF7B-3823EC3A8A85 v1
• Signal (Logic)• Tripping (Trip Logic)
5.11.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-461B67E7-3E21-4C9F-B33C-D81294D21AEE v1
• None
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 173Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.11.4 Function settingsGUID-A7084910-3F39-4F82-994C-CB19D2C42F70 v1
Table 93: Logic function - settings
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select)
Logic Mode OR (Select)
BinOutput SignalAddr
BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off
BinInp1 (R1) BinaryAddr Always off
BinInp2 (R2) BinaryAddr Always off
BinInp3 (S1) BinaryAddr Always off
BinInp4 (S2) BinaryAddr Always off
5.11.5 ParametersGUID-FFD23A75-A981-4847-AA5D-AA085E47A10A v1
Table 94: Logic function - parameters
Signal Description
ParSet 4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function is active.
Logic Mode Definition of the logic function to be performed by the 4 binary inputs. Possiblesettings:
• OR: OR gate with all 4 binary inputs• AND: AND gate with all 4 binary inputs• R/S flip-flop: Flip-flop with 2 set inputs (S1 and S2) and 2 reset inputs (R1 and
R2). The output is set or reset when at least one of the corresponding inputs isat logical 1 (OR gate). Reset inputs take priority over the set inputs.
BinOutput Output for signaling a trip (logic) respectively tripping (trip logic)
BlockInp Input for blocking the function
• F: not used• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
The output is always at logical 0 when the blocking input is at logical 1. The blockinginput acts as a reset input for the flip-flop function.
BinInp (R1)BinInp2 (R2)BinInp3 (S1)BinInp4 (S2)
Binary inputs 1 to 4 (AND or OR function)Reset inputs 1 and 2 and set inputs 1 and 2 (RS flip-flop)
• F: not used (OR logic or RS flip-flop in logic mode)• T: not used (AND logic in logic mode)• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
5.12 Delay/Integrator (DELAY)
5.12.1 Mode of operationGUID-B9A42598-E62D-4AAC-8FE6-8C1DA244A48C v1
General purpose timer for:
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
174 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
• Integration of pulsating binary signals to obtain a continuous signal, for example, outputof the loss-of-excitation function (out-of-step protection) or reverse power protection
• Extension of short I/P signals (pulse prolongation)• Simple time delay
5.12.2 FeaturesGUID-F97DB054-B13E-4E30-85DF-4F315988DC2F v1
• Input channel and blocking input assignable to:
• binary input signals• protection function output signals
• Input channel and blocking input can be inverted.• Adjustable reset time• 2 types of time delay:
• Integration: Only the time during which the input signal is at logical 1 counts at theend of the time delay.
• No integration: The total time from the instant the timer starts until it is either resetor expires counts.
5.12.3 Inputs and outputs
5.12.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-54D2B968-A98D-438A-935B-307DBC75FF29 v1
• None
5.12.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-43DB6E1E-779C-4DA4-9640-8ADC5AEF7422 v1
• Input signal• Blocking
5.12.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-E3343A2A-D0CE-496F-BAE3-E6B1D30F077E v1
• Pick-up• Tripping
5.12.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-705F1915-B394-44BA-BAB0-C33D582D02EE v1
• Time from the instant the timer starts
5.12.4 Function settingsGUID-42EEB88B-C55F-4D79-BF31-2427C9BD32E2 v1
Table 95: Delay function - Settings
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select)
Trip-Delay s 01.00 00.00 300.00 0.01
Reset-Delay s 00.01 00.00 300.00 0.01
Table continues on next page
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 175Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
Integration 0/1 0 0 1 1
BinaryInp BinaryAddr Always off
BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr
5.12.5 ParametersGUID-40CF9957-9979-46E5-8B57-8FA43FF48AD7 v1
Table 96: Delay function - Parameters
Signal Description
ParSet 4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function is active.
Trip-Delay Time between start signal at the input and the tripping signal at the output.
Reset-Delay Time required for the timer to reset after the input signal has disappeared.
Integration Determination of the response of the function in the presence of a pulsating inputsignal:
• 0: The delay continues to run, providing the input signal does not disappear forlonger than the reset time.
• 1: The time during which the input is at logical 1 is integrated, that is, trippingdoes not take place until the sum of logical 1 time equals the set delay time.
BinaryInp Timer input
• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
BlockInp Input for blocking the function
• F: enabled• T: disabled• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Trip Tripping signal
Start Pick-up signal
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
176 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.12.6 Configuration
5.12.6.1 Operation of the function without integrationGUID-BE6B0E31-83CE-4C88-ABCC-0BA8078CA6D6 v1
18000065-IEC19000470-1-en.vsdx
Start
Impulse prolongation
Tripping
0
0
0
t
t
t
(No tripping)
t
t
t
tR
0
0
0
t
t
t
t
t
t
0
0
0
0
0
0
tR tR
tA
(No tripping)
tA
(No tripping)
tAtA
tR tR tR
Start
Impulse prolongation
Tripping
IEC19000470 V1 EN-US
Figure 66: Operation of the delay function without integration
Tripping only takes place, if a start also occurs within the time tR.
• tA tripping time (Trip-Delay)• tR reset time (Reset-Delay)
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 177Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.12.6.2 Operation of the function with integrationGUID-FC89EE7B-03CD-4956-A9DD-B7B6D8AE6DFB v1
18000066-IEC19000471-1-en.vsdx
0
0
0
t
t
t
t
t
t
tR
0
0
0
t
t
t
t
t
t
0
0
0
0
0
0
tin t
Setting
(No tripping)
SettingSetting
0
0
0
t
t
t
t
t
t
tR
0
0
0
t
t
t
t
t
t
0
0
0
0
0
0
tin t
Setting
(No tripping)
SettingSetting
Start
Tripping
Integration
tin t tin t
Start
Tripping
Integration
tin t
Setting
(No tripping)
tR tR
tR tR tR tR
IEC19000471 V1 EN-US
Figure 67: Operation of the delay function with integration
• tint integrated time for tripping• tR reset time (Reset-Delay)• Setting Trip-Delay
5.13 Three-phase current plausibility 46 (I3PH)
5.13.1 Mode of operationGUID-64F2F15C-D25A-4639-9172-6BFC4F4EAF8B v1
Checking the plausibility of the three-phase current inputs for:
• monitoring the symmetry of the three-phase system• detection of a residual current• supervision of the CT input channels
5.13.2 FeaturesGUID-9D144F5E-9E88-4A00-99BF-76BF42FCE208 v1
Evaluation of:
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
178 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
• the sum of the three-phase currents• the sequence of the three-phase currents• provision for comparing the sum of the three-phase currents with a residual current input• adjustment of residual current amplitude• blocking at high currents (higher than 2 × IN)• blocking of phase-sequence monitoring at low currents (below 0.05 × IN)• insensitive to DC components• insensitive to harmonics
5.13.3 Inputs and outputs
5.13.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-6903FDD9-78BE-4BC7-BBBE-DB3C1ED26353 v1
• Phase currents
5.13.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-B5C04044-60D7-4FF6-B074-B7B6B9A18308 v1
• Blocking
5.13.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-5C506AEB-CB08-4C01-A40F-A781D202DD3F v1
• Tripping
5.13.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-16C59088-A3A6-4D1B-BC6A-F25743D4CEF4 v1
• Difference between the vector sum of the three-phase currents and the neutral current
5.13.4 Function settingsGUID-A1348575-07E6-4E14-A2B9-3A194AA0B057 v1
Table 97: Three-phase current plausibility function - settings
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select) (Select)
I-Setting IN 0.20 0.05 1.00 0.05
Delay s 10.00 0.1 60.0 0.1
CT-Compens 01.00 -2.00 2.00 0.01
CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr CT-I1-I3
BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off
Trip SignalAddr
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 179Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.13.5 ParametersGUID-501DB0C4-931D-457E-9D87-8412CAD11296 v1
Table 98: Three-phase current plausibility function - parameters
Signal Description
ParSet4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function is active.
I-Setting Current setting for tripping
Delay Time between start signal at the I/P and the tripping signal at the output.Forbidden settings:= 1 s for current settings = 0.2 IN
CT-Compens Amplitude compensation factor for the residual current input, enabling differenttransformation ratios of the main CTs for phase and residual currents to beequalized.The polarity of the residual current can be reversed by entering negativevalues.
CurrentInp Defines the current input channel.Any of the three-phase current inputs may be selected.
BlockInp Input for blocking the function.
• F: enabled• T: disabled• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Trip Tripping signal
If the phase sequence is incorrect, tripping takes place regardless of setting (I-Setting).
5.14 Three-phase voltage plausibility 47 (U3PH)
5.14.1 Mode of operationGUID-DFFD6CC5-9BC6-492C-9A4B-2A5DB48A79A9 v1
Checking the plausibility of the three-phase voltage inputs for
• detection of residual voltage• monitoring the asymmetry of the three-phase voltage system due to the zero-sequence
component• supervision of the VT input channels
5.14.2 FeaturesGUID-5AC61C76-D785-48F2-81F7-D87528474E04 v1
Evaluation of:
• the sum of the three phase voltages• the sequence of the three phase voltages• Provision for comparing the sum of the three phase voltages with a residual voltage input• Adjustment of residual voltage amplitude• Blocking at high voltages (higher than 1.2 × UN)• Blocking of phase-sequence monitoring at low voltages (below 0.4 × UN phase-to-phase)• Insensitive to DC components• Insensitive to harmonics
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
180 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Evaluation of the phase voltages is only possible in the case of Y connected inputtransformers, otherwise the residual component cannot be detected.
5.14.3 Inputs and outputs
5.14.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-38DA99A8-F99F-4607-BD92-17769ADB7CF6 v1
• Phase voltages• Neutral voltage (optional)
5.14.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-677C8FDF-21D7-4FAA-8718-EECCD5AA7607 v1
• Blocking
5.14.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-5D8F8B4C-BA80-4770-AC61-EB924CE8E064 v1
• Tripping
5.14.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-3AE816A8-2C66-47C3-8D60-5AA8E29686B8 v1
• Difference between the vector sum of the three phase voltages and the neutral voltage
5.14.4 Function settingsGUID-AA89E181-6F04-489A-97BF-871F7B7B3A36 v1
Table 99: Three-phase voltage plausibility function - settings
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select) (Select)
V-setting UN 0.20 0.05 1.20 0.05
Delay s 10.00 0.1 60.0 0.1
VT-Compens 01.00 -2.00 2.00 0.01
VoltageInp CT/VT-Addr VT U1-U3
SumInp CT/VT-Addr 0
BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off
Trip Signaladdr
5.14.5 ParametersGUID-978F9F5D-A13B-4F69-BBCB-4D44BAC54CEB v1
Table 100: Three-phase voltage plausibility function - parameters
Signal Description
ParSet4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function isactive.
V-setting Voltage setting for tripping
Delay Time between start signal at the I/P and the tripping signal at the output.Forbidden setting:= 1 s for voltage settings = 0.2 UN
Table continues on next page
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 181Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Signal Description
VT-Compens Amplitude compensation factor for the residual voltage input, enabling differenttransformation ratios of the main VTs for phase and residual voltages to beequalized.The polarity of the residual voltage can be reversed by enteringnegative values.
VoltageInp Defines the voltage input channel.Any of the three-phase voltage inputs may be selected.Not applicable with deltaconnected VTs.
SumInp Defines the neutral voltage input channel.Any of the single-phase voltage inputs may be selected.
Blocking Input for blocking the function.F: enabledT: disabledxx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Trip Tripping signal
If the phase sequence is incorrect, tripping takes place regardless of setting (V-Setting).
5.15 Peak value over and undercurrent protection 50(OCINST)
5.15.1 Mode of operationGUID-D7DE20A4-ACBA-4383-B058-EF37A04454F0 v1
• General current monitoring with instantaneous response (over and undercurrent)• Current monitoring where insensitivity to frequency is required (over and undercurrent)
5.15.2 FeaturesGUID-B08B6010-76E7-49F0-B403-0547FAB5381A v1
• Processes instantaneous values and is therefore fast and largely independent offrequency
• Stores the peak value following pick-up• No suppression of DC component• No suppression of harmonics• Single or three-phase measurement• Maximum value detection in the three-phase mode• Adjustable lower frequency limit fmin
5.15.3 Inputs and outputs
5.15.3.1 CT/VT inputsGUID-829955A0-16B4-4003-9B13-339BBA78AE46 v1
• Current
5.15.3.2 Binary inputsGUID-5E6D5A77-0397-4A00-A225-563A43365136 v1
• Blocking
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
182 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
5.15.3.3 Binary outputsGUID-A1943FFD-B15A-4583-A19B-4352E7F6922C v1
• Pick-up• Tripping
5.15.3.4 MeasurementsGUID-8618F28F-F326-4B28-A986-23B529E2A35D v1
• Current amplitude (only available if function trips)
5.15.4 Function settingsGUID-1C17972E-91CB-437B-9A6F-2DDC7F027B50 v1
Table 101: Peak value over and undercurrent function - settings
Text Unit Default Min Max Step
ParSet ç..1 P1 (Select)
Delay s 0.01 0.00 60.00 0.01
I-Setting IN 4.0 0.1 20 0.1
f-min Hz 40 2 50 1
NrOfPhases 1 Ph (Select)
CurrentInp CT-Addr 0
BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr
5.15.5 ParametersGUID-BD1F3084-704F-4617-ABE3-D8B9C56574AD v1
Table 102: Peak value over and undercurrent function - parameters
Signal Description
ParSet 4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a particular function is active.
Delay Time between the function picking up and tripping.
I-Setting Pick-up current setting.Setting restrictions:
• > 1.6 IN (when supplied from metering cores)• < 0.2 IN (when supplied from protection cores)
f-min Defines the minimum frequency for which measurement is required.Setting restriction:< 40 Hz (when supplied from metering cores)
MaxMin Defines operation as overcurrent or undercurrent.Settings:
• MAX: overcurrent• MIN: undercurrent
NrOfPhases Defines whether single or three-phase measurement.
CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel.All current inputs may be selected.
Table continues on next page
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 183Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
Signal Description
BlockInp Binary address used as blocking input.
• F: not blocked• T: blocked• xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Trip Output for signaling tripping
Start Output for signaling pick-up
5.15.6 ConfigurationGUID-7B3DB3D5-177E-44BC-BC57-57B378E2AF2C v1
The following parameters have to be set:
Current pick-up I-Setting
Delay Delay
Minimum frequency f-min
Over or undercurrent MaxMin
The instantaneous overcurrent function is a high-speed protection which operates in a widefrequency range. It is intended primarily for two applications.
A protection measuring peak value is necessary for protecting units, for which the influence ofDC component and harmonics may not be neglected. This is especially the case whererectifiers with semiconductors are involved.
Due to very small frequency sensitivity and with the peak value acquisition the protection cancovers a large frequency range.
The measuring principle of the function is relatively insensitive to frequency and operates in arange extending from 4% to 120% of rated frequency. It is therefore able to protect units withsynchronous starting equipment during the starting sequence before reaching systemfrequency (for example, gas turbine sets with solid-state starters).
The function detects when the instantaneous value of the input current exceeds the peak valuecorresponding to the setting. For example, for a setting of 10 IN, it will pick up when the inputcurrent exceeds 10 √2 IN = 14.14 IN (see Figure 68). A fault current of 6 × 1.8 √2 IN = 15.27 IN couldreach this level as a consequence of a DC component.
The minimum frequency must be entered for every application, because it determines thereset time. A low minimum frequency means a long reset delay and since a good protection isexpected to have a quick response, the reset time should be as short as possible, that is, theminimum frequency setting should not be lower than absolutely necessary.
Section 5 1MRK 505 406-UEN BBay protection functions
184 Bay protection functions REB500Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
18000067-IEC19000472-1-en.vsdx
0
5
10
1514.14
10 IN
t
0 t
Setting current
Output signal
0
5
10
1514.14
10 IN
t
0 t
Setting current
Output signal
IN
i
IN
i
IEC19000472 V1 EN-US
Figure 68: Operation of the peak value overcurrent function
Typical settings:Peak value phase fault protection
I-Setting according to application
Delay 0.01 s
f-min 40 Hz
1MRK 505 406-UEN B Section 5Bay protection functions
Bay protection functions REB500 185Technical manual
© Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved
186
187
ABB ABGrid Automation ProductsSE-721 59 Västerås, SwedenPhone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
www.abb.com/protection-control
© Copyright 2019 ABB.All rights reserved.
Scan this QR code to visit our website
1MR
K 5
05
40
6-U
EN